JP4286209B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by, for example, a pachinko gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, or a slot machine. Specifically, the present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine that can be played using a gaming medium and that pays out a prize gaming medium as a prize based on the fact that a payout condition is established by the gaming.

  In this type of gaming machine, what is conventionally known, for example, as a gaming machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a gaming area by a launching device, and a prize opening provided in the gaming area When a game medium wins a winning area such as the above, and a payout condition is satisfied, a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out to the player. Furthermore, there is provided a variable display unit capable of changing the display state, and configured to give a predetermined game value to the player when the display result of the variable display unit is in a predetermined specific display mode. is there.

  Note that the game value is the right that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the gaming area of the gaming machine is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a ball, or the advantageous state for a player. Or a condition where the winning ball payout condition is easily established.

  In a pachinko gaming machine, a combination of a predetermined display mode with a display result of a variable display unit that displays a special symbol is usually referred to as “big hit”. When the big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game shifts to a big hit gaming state where the hit ball is easy to win.

  The game progress in the gaming machine is controlled by game control means including a microcomputer or the like. The prize ball payout is controlled by a payout control means including a microcomputer or the like. When the payout control means is mounted on a payout control board different from the game control board (main board) on which the game control means is mounted, the progress of the game is performed by the game control means mounted on the main board. Be controlled. For this reason, the number of winning balls based on winning is determined by the game control means, and a control signal (command) indicating the number of winning balls is transmitted to the payout control board. Then, the payout control means performs a process of paying out the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning based on the control signal from the game control means.

  Further, in this type of conventional gaming machine, for example, even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the contents of the RAM provided in the game control means and the contents of the RAM provided in the payout control means are saved. As shown, a backup power supply is provided, and a detection signal from a power supply monitoring means for detecting a drop in power supply voltage is input to the main board and the payout control board, and the game control means and the payout control means store information in the RAM. There is something that executes processing to make it happen.

And in the initial setting process executed when power supply to the gaming machine is started, a confirmation process for checking whether or not the clear switch for initializing the contents of the stored RAM is pressed, In some cases, an initialization process for initializing the contents of the RAM is executed when the clear switch is pressed. Also, when power supply to the gaming machine is started, a delay means is provided for delaying the start timing of the game control means from the start timing of the payout control means, and transmitted from the game control means to the payout control means. In some cases, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that the payout control means cannot receive the control signal (Patent Document 1).
JP 2002-136754 A (paragraphs 0010-0014, 0021-0023, FIG. 1, FIG. 3, FIG. 5)

  However, the conventional gaming machine as described above has the following problems. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, a clear switch is pressed by a game clerk or the like to initialize the contents of the RAM. In this case, for example, if the timing at which the clear switch is pressed is delayed or the pressing time is short, the start-up timing of the game control means is later than the start-up timing of the payout control means. There may occur a situation in which the confirmation process recognizes the depression of the clear switch and the confirmation process of the initial setting process in the game control means cannot recognize the depression of the clear switch. When such a situation occurs, the control state of the payout control means is initialized by the initialization process, but the control state of the game control means is controlled when the power supply is stopped because the initialization process is not executed. As a result, the payout control means and the game control means do not coincide with each other, and normal control cannot be performed as a whole gaming machine. Further, even when the start timing of the game control means is not set to be later than the start timing of the payout control means, depending on the timing when the clear switch is pressed, confirmation of the initial setting process in one control means There is a possibility that a situation where the pressing of the clear switch can be recognized in the process but the pressing of the clear switch cannot be recognized in the confirmation process of the initial setting process in the other control means may occur.

  In order to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the control states of the payout control means and the game control means do not coincide with each other, in the initial setting process, a confirmation process for confirming pressing of the clear switch is interrupted as an interrupt process. It is conceivable to execute it. However, if an interrupt process is performed at the stage of the initial setting process, the initial setting is not completed, so that the initial setting process that should be performed after the interrupt process is completed may not be executed reliably.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to allow the game control means and the payout control means to save the stored contents for at least a predetermined period when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine having storage means that can reliably match the contents of the storage means on the game control side and the payout control side when power supply to the gaming machine is started.

Specific examples of means for solving the problems and their effects

(1) A game can be played using a game medium (for example, a game ball, a coin), and a payout condition is established by the game (for example, winning holes 53a, 53b, 54a, 54b, 58a provided in the game area, A game machine (a ball game machine, a pachinko game machine, a coin game machine, a slot machine) that pays out a prize game medium as a prize based on winning a special variable prize ball device 48;
Game control processing (for example, step S1 to step S35, initial setting processing (steps S1 to S4, S7, etc.), software delay processing (steps S81 to S86), and payout start command transmission processing (for example) Step S5), initialization processing (steps S10 to S13), restoration processing (steps S91 to S94), gaming device control processing (including steps S15 to S35), etc.) are executed, and the effects provided in the gaming machine Control devices (for example, decorative symbol display device 44b, motor 950, game effect lamps 13a, 13b, 13c, 16a, 16b, 17a, 17b, decorative lamps 32a, 32b, speakers 12a, 12b, etc.) Production control command (for example, production control signal and production control IN constituting production control command A game control microcomputer to transmit a signal) (for example, a microcomputer 99 for game control)
A payout means (for example, a ball payout device 154) for paying out the prize game medium;
A payout control process for controlling the payout means (for example, steps S701 to S760, initial setting process (steps S701 to S705, S708, and S720), and waiting for a payout start command to be transmitted from the main board 120. Control processing (steps S716 to S760) including processing (step S721, etc.), initialization processing (step S712), restoration processing (step S711), prize ball REQ interrupt processing (steps S541 to S548), etc. A payout control microcomputer (e.g., a payout control microcomputer 660),
An effect control microcomputer (for example, effect control) that executes effect control processing (for example, step S771 to step S784) for controlling the effect device based on the effect control command output from the game control microcomputer. Microcomputer 118),
Initialization operation means (for example, a clear switch 921) for outputting an initialization signal (for example, a clear signal) in response to an operation;
A relay board (for example, the peripheral command relay board 57) that relays the effect control command from the game control microcomputer and outputs it to the effect control microcomputer;
The game control microcomputer is:
Game state data (for example, special symbol process flag, prize ball addition value, etc.) indicating the progress of the game is stored (for example, processing in steps S221 and S222), and at least predetermined even if power supply to the gaming machine is stopped During the period, storage means for game control that holds the game state data (for example, RAM 111 backed up by a backup power source),
Based on the establishment of the payout condition, a payout number signal (for example, a prize ball control signal, a prize ball number signal) for designating the number of prize game media to be paid out, and a take-in signal for instructing to take in the payout number signal (for example, , A prize ball REQ signal) to a payout control microcomputer (for example, a part for executing the processing of steps S243, S251 to S255, S203);
On the condition that power supply to the gaming machine is started, a start signal (for example, a payout start command) and a capture signal (for example, a prize ball REQ signal) for instructing the payout control microcomputer to capture the start signal are provided. ) And a start signal output means (for example, a part for executing the process of step S5),
After the start signal output means outputs the start signal (for example, after a payout start command is output in the process of step S5), it is confirmed whether the initialization signal is output from the initialization operation means. Game control initialization signal confirming means (for example, a part for executing the process of step S7);
The power supply to the gaming machine is started, and it is confirmed that the initialization signal is not output by the game control initialization signal confirmation means (for example, it is determined NO in the process of step S7). Based on the condition, game control side recovery means for executing a game control side recovery process for recovering the progress state of the game based on the game state data stored in the game control storage means (for example, processing in steps S91 to S94) Part to execute)
When power supply to the gaming machine is started and it is confirmed that the initialization signal is output by the gaming control initialization signal confirmation means (for example, it is determined YES in the process of step S7) A game control side initialization means for executing a game control side initialization process for initializing the game state data stored in the game control storage means (for example, a part for executing the processes of steps S10 to S13); Including,
The payout control microcomputer indicates the number of unpaid premium game media that have not yet been paid out of the payout number of premium game media designated by the payout number signal output from the payout number signal output means. A payout control that stores payout amount data (for example, a prize ball unpaid number counter) (for example, the process of step S545b) and retains the unpaid amount data for at least a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Storage means (for example, a RAM mounted on the payout control microcomputer 660 that is backed up),
When the game control side restoration process is performed by the game control side restoration means, the game control microcomputer issues a restoration command (for example, a restoration command, see FIG. 78) to notify that effect. It further includes a recovery command output means for outputting as a control command (for example, a part for executing the process of step S94),
The effect control microcomputer executes the game control side recovery process based on the recovery command output by the recovery command output means (for example, when YES is determined in the process of step S773). Including a recovery notification means (for example, a portion for executing the process of step S774),
The dispensing control microcomputer is:
Register value updating means for updating the value of a specific register (for example, an external interrupt request register) to a predetermined value (for example, 80 (H)) on condition that the take-in signal is input from the game control microcomputer. For example, the external interrupt request register bit set performed by the internal mechanism of the payout control CPU 659),
Interrupt process execution means (for example, for payout control) for executing an interrupt process (for example, a prize ball REQ interrupt process) on condition that the value of the specific register is updated to a predetermined value by the register value update means Realized by the internal mechanism of the CPU 659 and the portion of the payout control means that executes the prize ball REQ interrupt process),
Generation of an interrupt based on execution of an interrupt prohibition instruction by a program (for example, execution of an interrupt prohibition instruction by a program (for example, step S701)) for shifting to an interrupt prohibition state for prohibiting execution of interrupt processing by the interrupt processing execution means The internal mechanism of the payout control CPU 659 to be prohibited),
Register value checking means for checking whether the value of the specific register is a predetermined value by the register value updating means (for example, a part for executing the processing of step S721, an internal mechanism of the payout control CPU 659);
In response to the power supply to the gaming machine, the interrupt prohibiting means shifts to the interrupt prohibited state, and the register value updating means outputs the value of the specific register based on the output of the activation signal capture signal. Is updated and output from the activation signal output means when the register value confirmation means confirms that the value of the specific register is a predetermined value (for example, when YES is determined in the process of step S721) An activation signal receiving means for receiving the activated activation signal (for example, a part for executing the process of step S725);
Whether or not the initialization signal is output from the initialization operation means on condition that the activation signal receiving means has received the activation signal (for example, it is determined YES in the process of step S726). A payout control initialization signal confirmation means to be confirmed (for example, a part for executing the processing of step S708);
In the payout control storage means, on condition that the payout control initialization signal confirmation means confirms that the initialization signal has not been output (for example, it is determined NO in the processing of step S708). A payout control side recovery means for executing payout control side recovery processing that enables payout based on the stored unpaid number data (for example, a portion that executes the process of step S711);
When it is confirmed by the payout control initialization signal confirmation means that the initialization signal has been output (for example, when it is determined YES in the processing of step S708), the payout control storage means saves it. Payout control side initialization means for executing payout control side initialization processing for initializing the unpaid-out number data being processed (for example, a part for executing the processing of step S712);
After the payout control side recovery process is performed by the payout control side recovery means, or after the payout control side initialization process is performed by the payout control side initialization means, execution of the interrupt process is permitted. Interrupt permission means (for example, a part for executing the process of step S717) for controlling to the interrupt permission state;
The number of payouts output by the payout number signal output means in the interrupt process controlled by the interrupt permission means and executed based on the output of the take-in signal of the payout number signal. A payout number signal receiving means for receiving a signal (for example, a part for executing the process of step S545a);
Unpaid number data adding means (for example, step) for adding the number of payouts of the premium game medium designated by the payout number signal received by the payout number signal receiving means to the unpaid number data stored in the payout control storage means A portion for executing the processing of S545b),
A prize game medium payout control means for controlling the payout means to pay out the unpaid premium game media indicated by the unpaid-out number data (for example, a part for executing the process of step S756 in the payout control means) ;
When shifting to the interrupt prohibited state by the interrupt prohibiting means, when the value of the specific register is not confirmed to be a predetermined value by the register value confirming means even after a predetermined period of time, further seen containing a unstartable information storage means the player control microcomputer stores the unstartable information indicating that the startup failure (e.g. portions for performing the processing of step S724 in the payout control means), a
The payout number signal output by the payout number signal output means and the start signal output by the start signal output means are signals transmitted through the same plurality of signal lines, respectively (FIG. 39, FIG. 40),
The take-in number signal output signal output by the pay-out number signal output means and the start-up signal take-in signal output by the start-up signal output means are signals transmitted through the same signal line, respectively. Yes, input to the interrupt terminal of the payout control microcomputer,
The payout control microcomputer further outputs the initialization signal from the initialization operation means by the payout control initialization signal confirmation means when the start impossible information is stored in the start impossible information storage means. The unpaid-out number data stored in the payout control storage means is initialized without executing confirmation of whether or not the payout control has been performed (for example, the portion of the payout control means that executes step S712) .

  According to such a configuration, when power supply to the gaming machine is started, before the confirmation by the game control initialization signal confirmation means is performed, the start-up signal and the capture signal are sent to the payout control microcomputer. Entered. Confirmation by the payout control initialization signal confirmation means is performed on condition that the activation signal is received during the interrupt prohibited state. As a result, the timing at which the confirmation by the game control initialization signal confirmation means is synchronized with the timing at which the confirmation by the payout control initialization signal confirmation means is synchronized, so that the payout is made when the game control side restoration process is performed The control side recovery process can be performed, and the payout control side initialization process can be performed when the game control side initialization process is performed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation where the contents of the storage means in the other microcomputer are not initialized even though the contents of the storage means in one microcomputer are initialized. Based on this, it is possible to reliably initialize the contents of each storage means in the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer. Similarly, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the contents of the storage means in the other microcomputer are not restored even though the contents of the storage means in one microcomputer are restored, and the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer The contents of each storage means in the computer can be reliably restored.

  The activation signal is received when the value of the specific register is confirmed to be a predetermined value during the interrupt disabled state. Thereby, the process before the restoration process or the initialization process in the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer can be reliably executed. Due to the interrupt process for receiving the activation signal, there is no problem that the process until the restoration process or the initialization process in the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer is not executed normally.

  In addition, when the game control side recovery process is performed, the game control microcomputer can output a recovery command to the effect control microcomputer to notify that the recovery process has been performed. Thereby, a player, a game hall manager, or the like can easily recognize that the restoration process has been performed.

(2) The game control microcomputer is configured to execute a predetermined time (for example, (initialization wait number specified value 1) × (initialization wait number) before the start signal output signal is output by the start signal output means. Game control side time measuring means (for example, a part for executing the processing of steps S81 to S86) for measuring the progress of the specified value 2) × (processing time of steps S83 and S84))
The activation signal output means outputs the activation signal take-in signal after it is measured by the game control side time measurement means that the predetermined time has elapsed (for example, after step S86 is judged YES, step S5 ).

  According to such a configuration, since the activation signal capturing signal is output after the game control side time measuring means has measured that the predetermined time has elapsed, the activation signal receiving means reliably receives the activation signal. be able to. For example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the start signal and the capture signal are output before the payout control microcomputer starts up, and the signals cannot be received.

  (3) The register value confirming means is configured to cause the register value updating means to output the specific register based on the output of the acquisition signal of the start signal when the interrupt prohibiting means has shifted to the interrupt prohibited state. Until the value of the specific register is updated (for example, until YES is determined in the process of step S721), it is repeatedly confirmed whether the value of the specific register is a predetermined value (for example, NO in the process of step S723) It is judged and S721 is repeatedly executed).

  According to such a configuration, whether or not the value of the specific register is a predetermined value is repeatedly confirmed, so that the activation signal can be reliably received.

  (4) In the payout control microcomputer, it is confirmed that the value of the specific register is not a predetermined value by the register value confirming unit when the interrupt prohibiting unit shifts to the interrupt prohibited state. (For example, on the condition that NO is determined in the process of S721 and YES in the process of S723) Steps S724, S714, S715, and S759) are further included.

  According to such a configuration, the game hall manager or the like can easily recognize from outside the occurrence of an abnormality in which the capture signal is not output and the activation signal cannot be received.

  (5) Further provided is signal input blocking means (for example, a unidirectional circuit 57a) for blocking signal input from the effect control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer.

  According to such a configuration, since no signal is input from the effect control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, an illegal signal or the like is input from the effect control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer. Cheating can be prevented.

(6) Game operating means that can be operated by the player while the game is in progress (for example, the operation button 19a, a cross key that can be indicated in the horizontal and vertical directions),
A game operation signal input means (for example, input port 669) for inputting a game operation signal corresponding to the operation when the game operation means is operated;
The effect control microcomputer is based on the game operation signal input by the game operation signal input means, and the effect device performs a specific effect (for example, an effect performed by a hammer 951 and a decorative symbol in cooperation with each other). The operation corresponding effect start means (for example, the portion of the effect control microcomputer 118 that executes the processes of steps S871, S873, and S802, in particular, the effect that the hammer 951 and the decorative pattern are co-operated in step S871). Processing to select.

  According to such a configuration, since the gaming operation signal input to the production control microcomputer is not input to the gaming control microcomputer, it is possible to prevent an illegal act using the gaming operation signal. it can. Moreover, since an effect according to the operation of the game operation means can be performed, the degree of intervention in the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(7) Type of the effect device (game effect lamps 13a, 13b, 13c, 16a, 16b, 17a, 17b mounted on the front door frame 4, decoration lamps 32a, 32b mounted on the game board 40, etc. Peripheral boards (for example, voice frame lamp board 92 and lamps) mounted with a control circuit that performs control in accordance with the type of light emitting, the type of sound emitted from the speakers 12a, 12b, etc. mounted on the front frame 3). A driver board 93),
The effect control microcomputer is configured to control the effect device according to the type of the effect device connected to the control circuit by bidirectional communication with the control circuit (for example, a lamp control signal or voice). Control signal) is output to the control circuit (see FIG. 79).

  According to such a configuration, since a signal from the peripheral board that is input to the production control microcomputer is not input to the game control microcomputer, an illegal act using the signal from the peripheral board is prevented. be able to.

(8) A movable member (for example, a hammer 951) that operates according to the gaming state;
Position detecting means (for example, sensors 954, 955) for detecting the position of the movable member;
The effect control microcomputer determines the position of the movable member based on the detection signal indicating the detection result of the position detection means (for example, the motor drive signal output in step S782 in the effect control microcomputer 118). The processing includes a portion for executing the processing of steps S880 and S884 for confirming the detection results of the sensors 954 and 955).

  According to such a configuration, since the detection signal input to the effect control microcomputer is not input to the game control microcomputer, an illegal act using the detection signal indicating the detection result of the position detection means is prevented. Can be prevented. Further, since the position of the movable member is determined by the position determination means, the operation of the movable member can be accurately controlled.

(9) The payout control microcomputer has a predetermined time (for example, (taken weight designation value) × (processing time of steps S721b and S721c)) before receiving the activation signal by the activation signal receiving means. It further includes a payout control side time measuring means for measuring the progress (for example, a part for executing the processing of steps S721a to S721c),
The activation signal receiving means receives the activation signal output from the activation signal output means after it is measured by the payout control time measuring means that a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, YES in step S721c) After the determination, the process of step S725 is executed).

  According to such a configuration, since it is confirmed that the value of the specific register is a predetermined value, the activation signal is received after it is measured that the predetermined time has elapsed by the payout control side time measuring means. Since the capture signal is output but the activation signal is not yet output, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience that the activation signal output thereafter cannot be received.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below in detail with reference to the drawings. In the following embodiments, a ball ball game machine is shown as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be other game machines such as a coin game machine and a slot machine, and a game medium. The gaming machine can be applied to any gaming machine as long as the gaming machine pays out a premium gaming medium as a prize based on the fact that a payout condition is established by the game. In the following description, the player side of the ball game machine 1 is represented by the front, front, front, front, and the opposite side of the player across the ball game machine 1 is back, back, rear, rear, Shown at the back and back. First, the entire configuration of the ball game machine 1 according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a front view of a ball game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 2 is a rear view of the ball game machine 1.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, a bullet ball game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2 that is formed into a vertically long frame, and is pivotally supported on one side of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable. A front frame 3 in which almost all of the main components of 1 are aggregated, a front door frame (glass frame) 4 that can be freely opened and closed at the front upper part of the front frame 3, and a front frame at the lower part of the front frame 3 The upper plate opening / closing frame 11 is provided freely. The main components provided in the front frame 3 include the front door frame 4, the game board 40, the lower plate 27, the ashtray unit 29, the operation handle 30, the mechanism plate 140, and the ball hitting device 130. Although not shown, a card unit device 731 (see FIG. 23) for lending a game ball to a player (lending a ball) is attached to the side of the ball game machine 1.

  The front door frame 4 is provided with a circular see-through window 5 as a game opening through which a game area 41 of a game board 40 described later with reference to FIG. 3 can be seen substantially. Is to be installed. The circular see-through window 5 and the multilayer glass plate are both formed in a vertically long circular shape. The front door frame 4 is mounted with various members on a metal frame base 4a (see FIG. 10 and the like) in which reinforcing peripheral frame ribs 199 are erected along the outer periphery in order to prevent rattling. Has been configured. In the frame base 4a, an opening for the circular see-through window 5 is opened, and along the opening, an upper decorative unit 22 as a decorative member is provided at the upper portion, and a left decorative unit 23a as a covering member is provided on the left side. A right decorative unit 24a as a covering member is mounted on the right side, and a lower decorative cover member 31 as a decorative cover member is mounted on the lower side. It is provided on the front side of the front door frame 4 so that game effect lamps 13a, 13b, 13c as light emitting members face inside the upper decorative unit 22, and light is emitted inside the left decorative unit 23a and the right decorative unit 24a, respectively. It is provided in the front side of the front door frame 4 so that the game effect lamp 16a and the game effect lamp 17a as a member may face. The game effect lamps 13a, 13b, 13c, 16a, and 17a are lit or flashed in accordance with the game state, and notify the player when the special game state is generated or when it continues, and the game atmosphere. It is something that excites. Note that the upper plate opening / closing frame 11 located below the see-through window 5 of the front door frame 4 has a lower portion continuous with the left decorative unit 23a when the front frame door 4 and the upper plate opening / closing frame 11 are closed. A left decorative unit 23b is provided at a position, and a right decorative unit 24b is provided at a lower position continuous with the right decorative unit 24a. The left decoration unit 23b and the right decoration unit 24b are provided on the front side of the upper plate opening / closing frame 11 so that the game effect lamp 16b and the game effect lamp 17b as light emitting members face each other. By flashing, it is possible to notify the player of the occurrence or continuation of a special gaming state and to increase the gaming atmosphere.

  In addition, speakers 12 a and 12 b that generate sound effects (including sound and the like) according to the progress of the game are provided on the front door frame 4 on the left and right of the upper decoration unit 22. Note that the speakers 12a and 12b also generate a notification sound to notify that when a ball lending abnormality occurs or when a ball lends (for example, every time a ball worth 100 yen is paid out). May be. Further, a prize ball LED 10 as a game-related information light emitting member for notifying that a predetermined number of prize balls have been paid out on the right side of the upper part of the left decoration unit 23a based on the occurrence of a winning ball (the prize ball unpaid portion) In particular, it is turned on when there is unpaid prize ball, and is turned off when there is no unpaid prize ball) so that it can be seen from the front of the front door frame 4. On the upper left side of the right decoration unit 24a, a ball break LED 9 serving as a game-related information light emitting member for notifying that there are not enough prize balls to be paid out (when a ball break switch 157 described later is detected). It is provided so as to be visible from the front surface of the front door frame 4. The award ball LED 10 and the ball break LED 9 are game-related information light-emitting members that emit light in association with information related to the game separately from the game effects performed in the ball game machine 1, and are provided separately from the game effect lamp. Yes, provided on the front side of the front frame 3. Further, on the right side of the lower decorative cover member 31 provided along the lower outer periphery of the circular see-through window 5, a see-through window 18 for visually confirming the stamp attached to the game board 40 is provided.

  The game effect lamps 13a, 13b, 13c, 16a, 16b, 17a, 17b, the ball break LED 9, and the prize ball LED 10 are respectively described in detail later with reference to FIGS. 12, 14, 15, and 17. It is mounted on a lamp board 191a, 191b, 191c, 192a, 192b, 193a, 193b, a ball-cut LED board 197, and a prize ball LED board 198 which are formed of printed wiring boards. And lamp board | substrate 191a, 191b, 191c, 192a, 192b, 193a, 193b is attached to the front door frame 4 so that it may mention later using FIG. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 15 and the like, the front frame 3 is attached to the front side. Note that a plurality of game effect lamps 13a, 13b, 16a, and 17a are mounted on each printed circuit board, and the game effect lamps 13c, 16b, and 17b, the ball break LED 9, and the prize ball LED 10 are each 1 on each printed circuit board. It is implemented one by one. The lamp boards 191a, 191b, 191c, 192a, 192b, 193a, 193b and the speakers 12a, 12b are connected to an audio frame lamp board 92 (see FIG. 23) described later. The ball cut LED board 197 and the prize ball LED board 198 are connected to a payout control board 98 (see FIG. 23) described later.

  Next, the structure of the upper plate 19 formed on the upper plate opening / closing frame 11 will be described. The upper plate 19 is configured by fixing a plate member in which a plurality of synthetic resin members are combined. A ball removal operation lever 21 is provided above the open side of the upper plate 19. This ball removal operation lever 21 is provided so as to be movable in the left-right direction, and moves in one direction against the biasing force of the spring, whereby the ball stored in the upper plate 19 is formed on the back side. The extraction path (not shown) and the ball extraction hole 444 flow down and are guided to the lower plate 27.

  The above-described upper plate 19 will be described in more detail. The upper plate 19 stores the prize balls paid out from the prize ball payout opening 20 formed on the upstream side thereof, and supplies the balls to the launch position. is there. The upper plate 19 has an operation unit that is operated when borrowing a ball via a card unit device 731 (see FIG. 23) provided adjacent to the ball game machine 1, and a player during the game. An operable operation button 19a is provided.

  The operation unit includes a ball balance switch, a return switch, and a balance display board 104 (see FIG. 23) on which each display LED is mounted. The balance display board 104 faces the upper surface of the upper plate 19. The upper plate wiring provided on the upper plate 19 and extending from the balance display substrate 104 described above is connected to the rear side of the front frame 3 from the wiring through opening 332 (see FIG. 15) formed in the lower portion of the front frame 3 on the shaft support side. And is connected to a payout control board 98 (to be described later) via an interface board 103 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the mechanism plate 140.

  Further, the operation button 19a is composed of a push-type detection switch. When the operation button 19a is operated (pressed), a movable provided on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 44b as will be described later with reference to FIG. The hammer 951 as a member operates. In the present embodiment, a push-type detection switch will be described as an operation means. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Any signal may be used as long as it outputs a signal according to the above. The operation button 19a is configured to input a detection signal to the effect control board 90 when pressed. A cylinder lock 26 for operating a locking device 128 that locks the front door frame 4 to the front frame 3 and locks the front frame 3 to the outer frame 2 faces the right side of the upper plate 19. It is out.

  The lower plate 27 attached to the lower part of the front frame 3 is a prize ball overflowing from the upper plate 19 and is discharged through an excess ball passage formed in the lower part of the rear surface of the mechanism plate 140, a connecting rod and the like. This is a surplus sphere storage tray (surplus sphere receiving tray) that stores surplus spheres, and a ball removal operation lever 28 is slidably attached below the lower tray 27. By operating the ball removal operation lever 28, the balls (prize balls) stored in the lower plate 27 can be removed and transferred to a portable ball box. An ashtray unit 29 is provided on the left side of the lower plate 27, and an operation handle 30 is provided on the right side. The operation handle 30 is a touch wiring (not shown) connected to the single firing switch 109 (stop switch) and the touch ring 110 (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of the firing motor 601 of the ball striking device 130 shown in FIG. Is installed and adjusts the elasticity. The touch wiring is bundled together with the wiring from the single firing switch 109. In addition, the schematic sectional drawing in AA in FIG. 1 is shown in FIG. 20, and it refers timely in the following description. In addition, the schematic sectional view in FIG. 20 is a sectional view in the vicinity of the game board 40.

  The card unit device 731 installed adjacent to the ball game machine 1 is operated by operating the operation unit such as the above-mentioned ball lending switch and return switch provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. . Thus, on the front side of the card unit device 731, an available indicator (not shown) for displaying whether or not the card unit device 731 is usable, and the card unit device 731 on either side of the ball game machine 1. A connection table direction indicator (not shown) for displaying whether or not the card is compatible and a card insertion slot (not shown) for inserting a magnetic card as a recording medium are provided. The card unit device 731 configured as described above is controlled by a unique control circuit, and is connected to an interface board 103 (to be described later) via a card unit wiring, and the interface board 103 is connected from the card unit wiring. To the payout control board 98. The function of the card unit device 731 may be built in the ball game machine 1 or may be a ball game machine that does not have the card unit device 731 and does not have a card lending function. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the card unit apparatus was illustrated as a unit apparatus for lending a ball | bowl to a player (lending a ball | bowl), the unit apparatus which can insert a banknote etc. may be sufficient, for example.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 2, a mechanism plate 140 equipped with various mechanisms for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the occurrence of winning balls is provided on the back of the ball game machine 1; A hitting ball launching device 130 having a firing motor 601 and a hitting ball rod 600 (see FIG. 19) is fixed to the back surface corresponding to the operation handle 30. A connecting rod 392 (see FIG. 2) for guiding the prize ball flowing down the passage to the lower plate 27 is fixed. Further, a metal locking device 128 that locks the front frame 3 to the latching piece of the outer frame 2 and locks the front door frame 4 to the front frame 3 is provided on the open side rear surface of the front frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. It has been.

  Among the configurations described above, the hitting ball launching apparatus 130 is provided with the launch control board 107, and the hitting ball launching apparatus 130 is driven and controlled by the launch control board 107. The firing control board 107 is accommodated in the board box 640 and connected to the dispensing control board 98 via the plastic frame relay board 108, and is in a predetermined state (for example, the card unit is not connected, the lower plate is full, When the ball is out of time or the like, the ball is not fired upon receiving a payout stop signal from the payout control board 98.

  The overall schematic configuration of the bullet ball gaming machine 1 has been described above, but the detailed configuration of the game board 40 and the mechanism plate 140 among the components constituting the bullet ball gaming machine 1 will be sequentially described below. First, the game board 40 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 3 is an enlarged front view of the game board 40, and FIG. 4 is an enlarged rear view of the game board 40.

  The game board 40 is formed of a substantially square plywood so as to be housed and fixed in a game board housing frame portion 393 (see FIG. 16) integrally formed on the back side of the front frame 3. The plywood is formed by laminating a plurality of plates including a conductive plate 40a made of, for example, a conductive synthetic resin as a conductive portion (see FIG. 20).

  On the surface of the game board 40, guide rails 42a and 42b each having a stainless steel plate formed in an arc shape are attached. As a result, the metal balls fired from the ball striking device 130 are guided into the circular game area 41 formed by the guide rails 42a and 42b. The guide rails 42a and 42b are attached by driving a metal rail mounting bracket 43 (see FIG. 20) into the game board 40. The rail mounting bracket 43 is driven so as to be in contact with the conductive plate 40a constituting the game board 40. For this reason, the guide rail 42a and the guide rail 42b can be electrically connected via the conductive plate 40a. The guide rail 42a defines and forms the lower left portion to the upper right portion of the game area 41, and the guide rail 42b defines and forms the upper right portion and the upper left portion of the game area 41.

  In the case of the game area 41, a special symbol display device 44a, a decorative symbol display device 44b, a special variable winning ball device 48, a normal variable winning ball device 58, a normal symbol display device 63, etc. are provided in the game area 41. A winning opening, a windmill flow direction, a windmill that changes the speed, or a number of obstacle nails 37a (see FIG. 20) are provided, and no winning area is awarded at the bottom of the game area 41. An out port 69 through which a hit ball is taken is provided. A number of obstacle nails 37a are driven in contact with the conductive plate 40a constituting the game board 40. For this reason, many obstacle nails 37a can be electrically connected to each other via the conductive plate 40a (see FIG. 20).

  The configuration of the game area 41 will be described in more detail. A passing gate 61 having a built-in gate switch 62 is provided on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 44b. When the gate switch 62 detects a hit ball passing through the gate switch 62, the normal symbol display device 63 provided on the right side of the special variable winning ball device 48 is variably displayed based on the detection signal ( Specifically, “◯” and “x” are alternately turned on at two upper and lower positions) to derive a display result (one of “O” and “x” is turned on at two upper and lower positions). That is, when “x” is lit on the normal symbol display device 63, the normal symbol display device 63 has derived the display result of the loss. On the other hand, when “◯” is lit on the normal symbol display device 63, the normal symbol display device 63 has derived the winning display result, and the normal variable winning ball device 58 is released for a predetermined time. The variation time of the normal symbol display device 63 is relatively short (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) in the probability variation mode in which the appearance probability of the jackpot symbol in the special symbol display device 44a is high, and in the probability variation mode. Is set relatively long (for example, 30 seconds) in the normal probability mode in which the appearance probability of the jackpot symbol in the special symbol display device 44a is low. Further, on the left side of the special variable winning ball device 48, a normal symbol start storage LED 68 for storing and displaying the number of hit balls passed through the gate switch 62 during the variable display of the normal symbol display device 63 (stores and displays up to four). Is provided.

  The special symbol start memory LED 67 stores and displays the number of balls detected by a start port switch 60 described later during the special symbol changing operation (stores and displays up to four balls). In addition, in the special symbol start memory LED 67, the upper limit value of the start memory number is fixed to four, but this is not limited, and the upper limit value of the start memory number can be changed when a predetermined condition is established ( For example, when the probability variation is a big hit, the number may be increased to 20).

  The normal variable winning ball device 58 is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 44 b disposed substantially at the center of the game area 41 and the special variable winning ball device 48 disposed above the out port 69. It is an electric tulip type variable winning ball apparatus that is driven to open and close. The ordinary variable winning ball device 58 has a built-in start port switch 60 for detecting a winning ball received during opening or closing. Thus, when the hit ball is detected by the start opening switch 60, the special symbol on the special symbol display device 44a and the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 44b start to fluctuate. The opening time of the normally variable winning ball device 58 is set to be relatively short (for example, 0.5 seconds) in the normal probability mode and relatively long (for example, 2 seconds) in the probability variation mode. ing. Further, even when the ordinary variable winning ball device 58 is not open, the hit ball is received from the start port 58a provided on the upper portion of the ordinary variable winning ball device 58.

  The special symbol display device 44a is a display device including a 7-segment LED that variably displays special symbols from “0” to “9”. Then, when the special symbol at the time of the fluctuation stop of the special symbol display device 44a is a predetermined jackpot symbol (for example, “3” or “7”), a specific gaming state is generated as a predetermined game value. The special variable winning ball device 48 is driven to open and close in a predetermined display manner described below. However, a part of the jackpot symbol (for example, “7”) is set as a probability variation symbol, and when the probability variation symbol enters the specific gaming state, the normal symbol display device 63 after the specific gaming state ends. Is set to be a probability variation mode in which the normal symbol variation time is shortened, the probability of hitting (hit the hit), and the probability of appearance of the big hit symbol in the special symbol display device 44a are increased.

  The decorative symbol display device 44b is a liquid crystal type display in which a display region 80 having a variable display region for individually displaying the decorative symbols of “0” to “9” on the left, middle, and right is formed. On the left side of the decorative symbol display device 44b, a hammer 951 is provided as a movable member used for game effects. When the operation button 19 a provided on the upper plate 19 is operated, the hammer 951 falls rightward with the movable portion 951 a as a fulcrum, and strikes the leftmost decorative design among the decorative designs displayed in the display area 80. Such an effect can be performed.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed on the decorative symbol display device 44b are variably displayed with a predetermined relationship with the special symbol variability display in order to enhance the decoration effect of the special symbol variation display on the special symbol display device 44a. A design with a decorative meaning. The predetermined relationship includes, for example, a relationship in which the decorative symbol variation display is started when the special symbol variation display is started, or the special symbol variation display is ended and the display result is displayed. This includes a relationship in which the variable display is terminated and the display result is displayed. When the display result of the special symbol display device 44a is a big hit symbol, the display result of the decorative symbol display device 44b is also a combination of predetermined big hit symbols that generate a big hit (for example, the same symbol is aligned on any of the hit lines) And the display result is controlled so that the consistency of both display results is maintained. In the present embodiment, a decorative member 66 is provided on the outer periphery including the special symbol start memory LED 67, the special symbol display device 44a, and the decorative symbol display device 44b. The outer peripheral part of the decoration member 66 is formed of a conductive member, and is attached by an attachment screw 66a (see FIG. 20) so as to contact the conductive plate 40a constituting the game board 40. For this reason, the outer peripheral part of the decoration member 66 is electrically connected to the conductive plate 40a.

  In addition, a restriction flange portion 75 that prevents balls from entering the decorative symbol display device 44b is extended from the upper end to the right end of the decoration member 66. A guide passage 76 is formed between the upper right end and the guide rail 42b that defines the right end. Further, a buffer member 70 (for example, rubber) is provided in the upper right part of the game area 41 so as to weaken the momentum of the ball passing through the guide passage 76 by the collision of the ball with the buffer member 70. It has become.

  The special variable winning ball device 48 that is driven and controlled when a specific gaming state is reached has an open / close plate 49 that is opened and closed by a solenoid 65, and a count switch 52 that detects a hit ball received by the open / close plate 49 is provided. Is provided. In addition, a special ball detector 51 is provided in the special variable winning ball device 48 (inside the opening and closing plate 49) to establish the right to continue the specific gaming state with the detection of the hit ball (V winning detection). Above the specific ball detector 51, a V shutter (not shown) is provided to prevent the hit ball from passing through the specific ball detector 51 until the opening / closing plate 49 is opened next once the V winning is detected. ing. This V shutter is driven to open and close by a solenoid 50. When the specific gaming state is reached, the opening / closing plate 49 is held until a predetermined time (for example, 28 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls are won within the predetermined time. Opening (hereinafter, this opening is referred to as an opening cycle), and when the hit ball received during the opening cycle is detected by the specific ball detector 51, the right to continue is established, and the above opening cycle is executed again. A maximum of 16 open cycles can be repeated on condition that a continuation right is established in each open cycle.

  In addition, the specific game state of the present invention is not limited to the above, and may be a state in which any one of the following controls (1) to (5) or a combination of controls is executed.

(1) For a predetermined time continuously or intermittently with respect to a variable winning ball apparatus that can be changed between a first state that facilitates winning of a hit ball and a second state in which the hit ball cannot win or is difficult to win. (2) A first state that makes it easy to win a hit ball by intervening detection of a hit ball in a specific winning or passing area, and a second state in which the hit ball cannot win or is difficult to win. (3) Control to directly discharge a predetermined number of prize balls regardless of the winning of the hit ball (4) Valuable Control to add valuable numbers to valuable storage media (cards, receipts, etc.) (5) Control to give points to a ball game machine that can be played based on the presence of a score. On the left and right of the ball device 48, winning ball detectors 56a, 5 The normal winning ports 54a and 54b incorporating the 6b are provided, and the normal winning ports 53a and 53b incorporating the winning ball detectors 55a and 55b are respectively provided above the outer sides of the normal winning ports 54a and 54b. .

  As described above, each of the winning openings and winning devices for winning the hit balls is provided with the respective switches 51, 52, 55a, 55b, 56a, 56b, 60 as the winning ball detectors for detecting the winning balls. However, this is used for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on these detection signals. A gate switch 62 that detects a winning ball but does not pay out the winning ball is also provided. As shown in FIG. 23, these switches (winning ball detectors) 51, 52, 55a, 55b, 56a, 56b are connected to the main board 120 via a switch relay board 95 described below. The main board 120 derives a prize ball control signal corresponding to the detection signals from these detectors to the payout control board 98. The payout control board 98 adds the number corresponding to the prize ball control signal as an unpaid number, and drives and controls a ball payout device 154, which will be described later, so as to sequentially pay out the prize balls. The switch (specific ball detector) 51 also has a function of detecting the establishment of the continuation right, and the switch (winning ball number detector) 52 has a counting function for restricting the opening / closing of the opening / closing plate 49. I also use it.

  The switch (starting ball detector) 60 is directly connected to the main board 120 as shown in FIG. (However, the number of winning ball control signals derived by the other winning ball detectors 51, 52, 55a, 55b, 56a, and 56b is relatively large, for example, seven, whereas the start switch 60 The number of prize ball control signals based on this is relatively small, for example, 4) This is because the circuit from the start port switch 60 is directly connected to the main board 120, and an illegal circuit board is placed in the middle. This is to facilitate the discovery of whether or not the incorporated wiring (called a hanging board or the like) is connected. Then, as in the case of the switch described above, control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls is performed. In addition, since the wiring directly connecting the start port switch 60 and the main board 120 has a color that is clearly different from the colors of the other wirings (in this embodiment, pink and yellow fluorescent colors). Therefore, it is easy to distinguish whether or not the wiring from the start port switch 60 is illegal. Further, since the wiring connecting the start port switch 60 and the main board 120 can be seen from the back side of the gaming machine, fraud can be detected more easily. Note that the switch (starting ball detector) 60 also serves as a starting function for displaying variation in the special symbol display device 44a and the decorative symbol display device 44b. Further, the game board 40 is provided with a plurality of decorative lamps 32a and 32b for enhancing the decorative effect.

  As described above, the game board 40 is provided with a large number of switches, solenoids, decorative lamps, and the like. These are the main board 120 via the audio frame lamp board 92 and the effect control board 90 or the switch relay board 95. To be connected to. That is, as shown in FIG. 23, the switches 51, 52, 55a, 55b, 56a, 56b, 62 and the solenoids 50, 59, 65 provided on the game board 40 are connected to the main board 120 via the switch relay board 95. Decorative lamps 32 a and 32 b provided on the game board 40 are connected to the main board 120 via a lamp driver board 93, an audio frame lamp board 92 and an effect control board 90.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 4, a back pack 81 a is attached to the center of the back side of the game board 40 on the back side of the game board 40. In the center of the back pack 81a, an opening (not shown) facing the decorative symbol display device 44b is formed. The decorative symbol display device 44b and the decorative symbol display device 44b are accommodated in the back pack 81a. A liquid crystal box 81b is attached. The decorative symbol display device 44b in the present embodiment is configured to include an inverter substrate 88 and liquid crystal relay substrates 91a and 91b. The liquid crystal relay board 91a relays signals transmitted from the effect control board 90 to the liquid crystal relay board 91b and the inverter board 88. The liquid crystal relay substrate 91b relays a signal transmitted from the liquid crystal relay substrate 91a to the decorative symbol display device 44b. The inverter board 88 controls the backlight provided in the decorative symbol display device 44b in accordance with the type of information signal from the liquid crystal relay board 91a.

  The effect control board box 125 is directly attached to the rear surface of the liquid crystal box 81b. In this effect control board box 125, a lamp driver board 93, an audio frame lamp board 92, and an effect control board 90 are accommodated and attached. On the rear surface of the liquid crystal box 81b, a slide hole (not shown) with which an engagement piece (not shown) formed in the effect control board box 125 is engaged, and a locking piece 125a for fixing the effect control board box 125 are provided. And are formed. Thus, after the engagement piece of the effect control board box 125 is inserted into the slide hole, the effect control board box 125 is slid downward, whereby the locking piece 125a is locked to the upper surface of the effect control board box 125. Thereby, the effect control board box 125 is fixed to the rear surface of the liquid crystal box 81b. In addition, it can remove by bending the latching piece 125a and sliding the production | presentation control board box 125 upwards. The structure of the ball dispensing device 154 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7.

  The lamp driver board 93 relays the connection between the lamp relay board 89 and the voice frame lamp board 92 for controlling the lighting state of the decoration lamps 32a and 32b provided on the game board 40. The voice frame lamp board 92 includes decoration lamps 32a, 32b provided on the game board 40, game effect lamps 13a, 13b, 13c, 16a, 16b, 17a, 17b provided on the front frame 3, the front door frame 4 and the like, a speaker. 12a, 12b and the like are collectively controlled in accordance with information signals from the main board 120. The audio frame lamp board 92 is provided with a volume switch 127 for switching the volume.

  The effect control board 90 drives and controls the variable display operation of the decorative symbol display device 44b in accordance with the type of information signal from the main board 120, and further exchanges information signals with the audio frame lamp board 92. Is.

  A recess is formed in the cover surface of the effect control board box 125. A peripheral power supply relay board 47 and a peripheral command relay board 57 are accommodated in the recess, and a cover member 125b is attached from above. When the cover member 125b is attached, the surface of the cover member 125b and the surface of the effect control board box 125 are aligned. The peripheral power supply relay board 47 relays the power supplied to the voice frame lamp board 92. The peripheral command relay board 57 relays an information signal to be output to the effect control board 90.

  Also, a winning ball guiding cover body 82 is attached below the back pack 81a. A winning ball guiding path (not shown) for guiding a winning ball from each winning opening provided on the game board 40 is formed on the front surface thereof. It has been.

  A symbol board box 126 is attached to the rear surface of the winning ball guiding cover body 82. A special symbol and special symbol memory board 85, a normal symbol board 86, a normal symbol memory board 87, a symbol relay board 84, a lamp relay board 89, and a switch relay board 95 are accommodated in the symbol board box 126. It is attached.

  The special symbol and special symbol memory board 85 are for controlling the display state of the special symbol display device 44a and the special symbol start memory LED 67 in accordance with the information signal from the main board 120.

  The normal symbol board 86 is for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display device 63 according to the information signal from the main board 120. The normal symbol memory board 87 is for controlling the normal symbol start memory LED 68 in accordance with an information signal from the main board 120.

  The symbol relay board 84 relays signals transmitted from the main board 120 to the special symbol and special symbol storage board 85, the normal symbol board 86, and the normal symbol storage board 87. The lamp relay board 89 relays signals transmitted from the lamp driver board 93 to the decorative lamps 32a and 32b.

  As described above, the switch relay board 95 relays the connection between the switches 51, 52, 55a, 55b, 56a, 56b, 62 and the solenoids 50, 59, 65 provided on the game board 40 and the main board 120. Is.

  A main board mounting base 135 is provided on the rear surface of the symbol board box 126 so as to be hinged on the left side and freely openable and closable. With this configuration, the main board box 136 can be opened and closed, and maintenance of the special variable winning ball device 48 and the like provided in the winning ball guiding cover body 82 can be facilitated. The main board 120 is housed and attached in the main board box 136. In the present embodiment, since the main board 120 is attached to the game board 40, when the board is replaced with a new game board, the main board 120 can be replaced together by replacing the game board itself.

  Here, the structure of the main board box 136 will be described. The main board box 136 includes a main board box base 136a for attaching the main board 120, a main board box cover 136b, a caulking screw 136c for firmly attaching the main board box cover 136b to the main board box base 136a, and a caulking cap 136d. It is composed of The main board box 136 is formed by covering the main board box base 136a with the main board box cover 136b, inserting and screwing caulking screws 136c into caulking portions 136e provided on the left and right sides, and sealing with caulking caps 136d from above. As long as the crimping portion 136e is not cut, it cannot be opened. Accordingly, it can be easily determined whether or not the main board box 136 has been opened based on whether or not the crimping portion 136e is cut.

  A relay board mounting box 383 is mounted on the upper right side of the back pack 81a. In the relay board mounting box 383, the frame lamp relay board 99a is accommodated and attached. A board external terminal board 96 is attached to the rear surface of the relay board mounting box 383. The board external terminal board 96 is game information necessary for business management of the ball game machine 1 (for example, jackpot 1 information for notifying that the jackpot gaming state is in effect, a jackpot gaming state with a probability variation pattern, and the jackpot 2 jackpot information that informs that the probability change due to the big hit and the big hit (signal that continues to be output during the big hit and the probability fluctuation), the fact that the probability fluctuation after the big hit state end by the probability fluctuation design Probability variation information, starting port information for informing the number of hitting balls whose starting ball detector is turned on, symbol determination number 1 information for informing the number of variation operations of the special variation display device, symbol for informing the number of variation operations of the normal variation display device An external connection terminal (not shown) for outputting information on the number of confirmed times 2 and information on the number of times of opening and closing of the normally variable winning ball apparatus to the management computer installed in the game hall Have had), these pieces of information are provided from the main board 120. Further, information such as which symbol is a big hit and which symbol is stopped may be output.

  Although the configuration of the game board 40 has been described in detail above, the game board 40 configured as described above has a game board storage frame portion 393 formed on the back side of the front frame 3 as shown in FIG. It is designed to be stored and fixed in the box. As is well known, the game board storage frame portion 393 is formed in a step shape on the back surface of the front frame 3 so as to receive the game board 40 configured in a substantially square shape, and presses and fixes the back surface of the stored game board 40. Two game board locking levers 366 are attached to each of the left side and the right side of the game board storage frame 393. Note that the mounting position of the game board locking lever 366 is not limited to such a position, and may be provided at an appropriate place. In addition, the lower part of the game board storage frame 393 is a flat support plate on which the lower side of the game board 40 is placed, and the out ball that guides the out ball to substantially the center of the support plate. A communication port 333 is formed. Further, in a state where the game board 40 is housed and fixed by the game board locking lever 366, the mechanism plate 140 is covered from the back surface, and the mechanism plate 140 is provided on one side of the game board storage frame portion 393. A retaining hole 177a (see FIG. 5) of the reinforcing hinge member 176 fixed to one side of the mechanism plate 140 is locked to a shaft pin 315 protruding on the plastic frame hinge metal fitting 314 fixed to the upper and lower sides. Accordingly, the mechanism plate fixing protrusion 364 that is pivotally supported so as to be freely opened and closed and is planted at an appropriate position of the game board storage frame portion 393 is formed in the through hole of the mechanism plate locking member 167 provided on the mechanism plate 140. The mechanism plate 140 can be held in a closed state by sliding the mechanism plate locking member 167 through the. Thus, in this embodiment, since the mechanism plate locking member 167 is provided and the slide type is adopted, the mechanism plate locking member 167 does not contact the inner wall of the outer frame 2. Thereby, for example, compared with the conventional type employing a lever type provided with a mechanism plate locking lever, it is possible to prevent inconvenience that the mechanism plate locking member 167 is damaged when the mechanism plate 140 is closed. Can do. The mechanism plate 140 may be fixed to the front frame 3 and cannot be opened and closed.

  Next, the configuration of the mechanism plate 140 provided on the back surface of the ball game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the mechanism plate 140. 2 and 5, the mechanism plate 140 is provided with a prize ball tank 147 that mainly stores prize balls and a ball alignment rail member 148 that guides the prize balls stored in the prize ball tank 147 while aligning them downstream. A ball path cover member 156 that has a curved rail portion and guides a ball from the curved rail portion, and a ball payout device 154 that pays out a winning ball based on winning a prize (in this embodiment, a rental ball is also paid out) May be paid out only for the winning ball), an arrangement for processing the hit ball including the winning ball mainly driven into the game board 40, and the upper ball 19 and the lower plate for the winning ball. The lower structural part provided with the structure for guiding to 27 is integrally formed on the mechanism plate main body 141 so as to form the opening window 146. The mechanism plate main body 141 has an upper part and a right part (viewed from the back side of the ball game machine 1), a left side (viewed from the back side of the ball game machine 1), and a lower part of the mechanism plate main body 141, respectively. The upper plate 142, the left side plate 143, and the lower plate 144 that are configured are connected by a mounting screw 141a. The upper plate 142, the left side plate 143, and the lower plate 144 in the present embodiment are formed of a green transparent polycarbonate resin into which a green pigment is encased in order to improve wear resistance. The transparent color is green and transparent, but if it is not colored, it will become yellowish and transparent, and the aesthetics will be impaired (it will feel dirty with cigarette dust). That has been solved.

  Further, in order to increase the strength of the mechanism plate 140, a reinforcing hinge member 176 that is attached to the shaft support side of the opening window 146 across the upper constituent part and the lower constituent part is attached by an attaching screw 176a. The reinforcing hinge member 176 is made of metal, and the shaft pin 315 (see FIG. 16) of the plastic frame hinge metal fitting 314 is locked to the latching hole 177a of the mounting piece 177 bent at the upper and lower ends thereof. The mechanism plate 140 is pivotally supported with respect to the front frame 3 so as to be openable and closable.

  In the present embodiment, the reinforcing hinge member 176 is grounded via the ground wire. For example, the reinforcement hinge member 176 may be configured to be grounded via a ground wire to a ground outlet provided in a game arcade. In general, since the card unit device 731 is grounded via a ground line, the card unit device 731 may be connected to an FG (frame ground) terminal of the card unit device 731 via a ground line. Hereinafter, as will be described, various conductive devices attached to the gaming machine are grounded by being electrically connected to the reinforcing hinge member 176.

  Next, the configuration of the mechanism plate 140 will be described for each component. First, in the upper component part, a prize ball tank 147 for storing a large amount of prize balls and a prize ball supplied from the prize ball tank 147 are divided into a plurality of rows (in this embodiment, two rows) by a partition wall 178. A ball alignment rail member 148 that is aligned and flowed down, and a prize ball guided by the ball alignment rail member 148 is provided above a curve rail portion that changes the direction from the horizontal direction to the vertical direction toward a ball dispensing device 154 described later. The frame external terminal plate 102 is provided at a predetermined position of the upper plate 142.

  The prize ball tank 147 is attached to a mounting boss 179 projecting from the upper end side of the upper plate 142 with mounting screws 164a by mounting pieces 164 projecting from the left and right sides. The prize ball tank 147 is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface made of ABS resin (conductive synthetic resin) containing 8% by weight of carbon, and has a bottom surface 165 that is inclined. The prize ball tank 147 is connected to the reinforcing hinge member 176 by wiring and is grounded. In the game store, the balls are supplied to the prize ball tank 147 of the gaming machine after passing through the supply path provided on the gaming machine installation island, so the balls are already charged before being supplied to the prize ball tank 147 There are many. However, since the prize ball tank 147 is formed of a conductive synthetic resin containing carbon and is grounded via the reinforcing hinge member 176, the electric charges of the balls stored in the prize ball tank 147 are on the ground side. Escape electrification is eliminated.

  The ball alignment rail member 148 disposed on the downstream side of the prize ball tank 147 is attached to the attachment boss 180 with an attachment screw 148a in an inclined manner from one end to the other end of the upper component part, and a partition wall 178 is provided at the center of the inside. Is erected. The partition walls 178 are formed so as to be gradually higher in order to surely align the prize balls that have flowed out from the drop port of the prize ball tank 147 in two rows as they go downstream. The ball alignment rail member 148 is made of ABS resin containing 8% by weight of carbon. Further, a connection hole 148b is provided at the upper center of the ball alignment rail member 148, and the mounting piece 147a provided at the lower right of the prize ball tank 147 is sandwiched between the mounting balls 148b so that the ball can be attached with the mounting screw 148c. It is configured. Thereby, the ball alignment rail member 148 and the prize ball tank 147 can be electrically connected to each other by the direct contact between the connection hole 148b of the ball alignment rail member 148 and the mounting piece 147a of the prize ball tank 147. .

  Further, a ball leveling member 149 is suspended from an upper portion of the ball alignment rail member 148 by a mounting screw 149a with the mounting boss 181 as a fulcrum, and the ball alignment rail member 148 has two upper and lower stages. The sphere that flows down is made one stage by the action of a weight (not shown) embedded in the sphere smoothing member 149.

  A frame external terminal plate 102 having an external connection terminal to which a signal line with the outside is connected is attached to the upper part on the downstream side of the ball alignment rail member 148 described above. The mounting portion of the frame external terminal plate 102 is recessed so that the protruding portion of the solder surface does not contact. As an external connection terminal provided on the frame external terminal board 102, a connector for connecting a signal line between the outside (for example, a management computer) and the ball game machine 1, a connector for outputting the number of prize balls , Connectors for outputting signals from the first and second door opening switches 111 and 112 are provided. Further, an external information seal 183 is provided on the side of the frame external terminal plate 102 so as to indicate external information to which the frame external terminal plate 102 is connected.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the upper component portion located on the upper plate 142 has a mechanism plate locking mechanism mounted on the mounting boss 184 at a position corresponding to the upper left portion of the prize ball tank 147 and the upper portion of the frame external terminal plate 102. A member 167 is provided by a mounting screw 167a so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. The mechanism plate locking member 167 is formed with a through hole through which a tip end portion of the mechanism plate fixing projection 364 planted and fixed at a predetermined position of the game board storage frame portion 393 is formed. By sliding so as to release the engagement with the mechanism plate fixing protrusion 364, the fixed state of the mechanism plate 140 to the game board storage frame portion 393 can be released. The mechanism plate locking member 167 is provided at the upper left portion of the prize ball tank 147 and the upper portion of the frame external terminal plate 102, so that the mechanism plate 140 is firmly fixed to the game board storage frame portion 393. Can be stabilized. Note that there is another mechanism plate locking member 167 at the open end of the lower component, and a total of three members are provided.

  A first door opening switch 111 and a second door opening switch 112 are respectively attached to the upper left of the prize ball tank 147 and the rear surface of the mechanism plate 140 at the upper right portion of the frame external terminal plate 102 with mounting screws 111a. , 112a. The first door opening switch 111 in the present embodiment detects that the front door frame 4 and the front frame 3 are opened, and that the mechanism plate 140 and the front frame 3 are opened. The second door opening switch 112 detects that the front frame 3 and the outer frame 2 are opened. The first door opening switch 111 and the second door opening switch 112 are connected to the frame external terminal plate 102. Thus, since the first door opening switch 111 and the second door opening switch 112 are provided, the open state of the outer frame 2, the front frame 3, and the front door frame 4 can be confirmed by an external device or the like. The wirings of the first door opening switch 111 and the second door opening switch 112 are connected to the frame lamp relay board 99a, then to the audio frame lamp board 92, and via the effect control board 90, the main board. 120, and by controlling lighting of a game effect lamp or the like by the audio frame lamp board 92 based on the information signal from the main board 120, the outer frame 2, the front frame 3 and the front door frame 4 are opened. May be notified.

  Next, the structure of the intermediate structure part located in the upper board 142 is demonstrated. The intermediate structural portion is formed with intermediate portion reinforcing ribs 185a and 185b that project vertically from the sides. In addition, a ball passage (not shown) through which a ball passes is formed on the surface side of the intermediate component portion by attaching the passage cover 186 with an attachment screw 186a. This ball removal passage communicates with a downstream portion of a ball removal passage, which will be described later, and guides a ball waiting on the ball alignment rail member 148 and the prize ball tank 147 to the outside of the ball ball game machine 1 (ball game machine 1 This will lead to the island's collection dredging). The ball is guided to the ball passageway by releasing a ball removal stopper 151 provided on the ball passage cover member 156. The ball stopper 151 is attached by a mounting screw 151b so as to be rotatable about a mounting boss 700 protruding from the upper portion of the passage cover 186 by rotating the ball removing lever 151a. In the present embodiment, the ball removal stopper 151 can be released by rotating the ball removal lever 151a 90 degrees clockwise. When the ball removal stopper 151 is released, the ball removal valve 152 that is swingably attached is released, and a ball is guided from below the ball removal valve 152 into the ball removal passage. On the other hand, the ball removal stopper 151a can be fixed by rotating the ball removal lever 151a 90 degrees counterclockwise. When the ball removal stopper 151 is fixed, the ball removal valve 152 is fixed and the ball is not introduced into the ball removal passage. Note that a ball leveling piece 161 protruding from a ball path cover member 156, which will be described later, at the upper portion on the downstream side of the ball alignment rail member 148 is for leveling the ball.

  A ball passage cover member 156 having a curved rail portion and a ball passage portion connected to the downstream side of the ball alignment rail member 148 is attached to the attachment boss 156a with an attachment screw 156b on the upper portion of the intermediate component portion. . The curved rail portion of the ball passage cover member 156 branches the sphere flowing down from the ball alignment rail member 148 to either the above-described ball removal passage or the ball passages 188 and 189 that guide the ball to the ball dispensing device 154. . A ball dispensing device 154 is disposed on the downstream side of the curved rail portion.

  The ball passage cover member 156 is made of an ABS resin containing 8% by weight of carbon. An attachment piece 156c is provided on the upper left side of the ball passage cover member 156. The attachment piece 148d provided on the lower right side of the ball alignment rail member 148 described above is sandwiched therebetween and attached with an attachment screw 156d. It is configured as follows. Thereby, the ball passage cover member 156 and the ball alignment rail member 148 are electrically connected to each other by the direct contact between the mounting piece 156c of the ball passage cover member 156 and the mounting piece 148d of the ball alignment rail member 148. Can do.

  On the downstream side of the ball passage cover member 156, the ball break switch 157 is detachable by a locking piece at a position where it can be detected that 27 to 28 game balls are present between the ball payout device 154 and the ball discharge device 154. It is installed. The ball break switch 157 is connected to the sunpack relay board 101 (see FIG. 2). When the ball break switch 157 no longer detects a ball, the ball break switch 157 inputs a signal to the payout control board 98 and the main board 120 via the sunpack relay board 101, and the payout motor 115 of the ball payout device 154 described later. Is stopped and the payout of prize balls is disabled.

  A ball stopper member 159 is attached to the lower portion of the ball passage cover member 156 by an attachment screw 159a. The structure of the ball stopper member 159 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The ball stopper member 159 is made of stainless steel. Thereby, the ball stopper member 159 and the ball passage cover member 156 can be electrically connected by directly contacting each other.

  The ball passage cover member 156 is provided with a locking claw 706 that engages with an engagement hole 169 of a payout device cover 168 described later. Further, on both lower sides of the locking claw 706, shaft support protrusions 162 through which the shaft support holes 707 of the dispensing device cover 168 are inserted project. The payout device cover 168 is attached with a shaft support hole 707 pivotally supported on the shaft support protrusion 162 of the curve rail member 150, and is engaged with the locking claw 706 above the payout device cover 168. Thus, an engagement hole 169 that holds the disengagement device cover 168 in an open state is formed. On the lower outer wall surface of the payout device cover 168, a seal 187 describing the matters to be removed in the operation of removing the case 155 of the ball payout device 154 is attached.

  Below the ball passage cover member 156 described above, a ball dispensing device mounting portion 154a for mounting the ball dispensing device 154 is formed. A slide hole 154b that engages with an engagement piece (not shown) formed in a case 155 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape that accommodates the ball dispensing device 154 is fixed to the ball dispensing device mounting portion 154a. A locking piece 154c is formed. Then, after the engaging piece of the case 155 is inserted into the slide hole 154b, the case 155 is slid to the left side, whereby the locking piece 154c is locked to the side surface of the case 155, and thereby the case 155 is thrown out. It is fixed to the device mounting portion 154a. Note that the case 155 can be removed by bending the locking piece 154c. The structure of the ball dispensing device 154 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7.

  This is the end of the description of the intermediate component of the mechanism plate 140. Next, the lower component (lower plate 144) of the mechanism plate 140 will be described. As shown in FIG. A payout control board box 123 that accommodates the payout control board 98 is attached to the right side as viewed, and a power supply board box 122 that accommodates the power supply board 910 is attached to the left side as viewed from the back. The payout control board box 123 is also configured similarly to the structure of the main board box 136 described above. That is, the payout control board box 123 is formed by covering the payout control board box base with the payout control board box cover, inserting and screwing caulking screws into the caulking portions provided on the left and right sides, and sealing with caulking caps from above. It is configured so that it cannot be opened unless the crimped portion is cut (none is shown). Thereby, it can be easily determined whether or not the payout control board box 123 has been opened based on whether or not the crimping portion is cut.

  A winning ball guiding path (not shown) for guiding a winning ball and an out ball are guided to the front side (the inner side of the mechanism board main body 141 facing the game board 40) of the lower component to which the payout control board box 123 is attached. An out ball passage (not shown) is formed, and a prize ball passage 709, a communication passage 710, and an excess ball passage 711 are formed on the back side of the lower component (outside the mechanism plate main body 141) and a ball removal passage. A downstream portion 712 is also formed.

  A board mounting portion 718 for attaching the sunpack relay board 101 is formed on the right side of the ball extraction passage downstream portion 712 so as to surround the sunpack relay board 101. The mounting screw 101a is attached to a mounting boss 719 projecting on the inner side of 718.

  In the payout control board box 123, an error display seal 735 indicating the error contents of the error release switch 665 (see FIG. 24) provided in the payout control board 98 and a history of opening the payout control board box 123 are described. An opening history seal 736 is attached to the power supply board box 122, and a part name sticker indicating the name of the power supply part provided on the power supply board 910 and a procedure seal 737 describing the procedure of the backup clearing method are attached. Has been.

  Next, the configuration of the right side portion (hereinafter referred to as the right side lower component) as viewed from the back of the lower component of the mechanism plate 140 will be described. A prize ball passage 709 is formed on one upper side of the lower right component part of the mechanism plate 140, and an upper plate communication port 713 is formed at the lower end of the prize ball passage 709. The upper plate communication port 713 guides a prize ball to the upper plate 19 provided on the front surface of the ball game machine 1. A communication passage 710 is formed at one side of the upper plate communication port 713, and an excess ball passage 711 is connected to the downstream of the communication passage 710.

  Thus, when a large number of prize balls based on the winnings are paid out and the upper plate 19 is filled with the prize balls, and finally reaches the upper plate communication port 713 and further prize balls are continuously paid out, It is guided to the surplus ball passage 711 via 710 and then discharged to the lower plate 27 via the connecting rod 392. When the award ball continues to be paid out, the lower plate 27 is also full, but when it reaches the full tank detection lever 714 provided on one side wall of the surplus ball passage 711, the full tank detection lever 714 is When it is pressed, the full tank switch 158 is turned ON, and the driving of the payout motor 115 of the ball payout device 154 is stopped, thereby disabling the payout operation of the prize balls and the rental balls. At this time, the driving of the firing motor 601 of the ball striking device 130 is also stopped, but may not be stopped. The upper end of the full tank detection lever 714 is swingably provided with its upper end being pivotally supported by a shaft projection, and the actuator of the full tank switch 158 is positioned behind the full tank detection lever 714 to swing the full tank detection lever 714. It detects motion. The full switch 158 is fixed to the mounting boss 716 on the mechanism plate 140 side by a fixing screw 158a by a fixing hole 715 at the top thereof.

  Further, the above-described prize ball passage 709, the ball removal passage downstream portion 712, and the rear surface of the surplus ball passage 711 are covered by a lower passage cover body 170 that is fixed to the attachment boss 717 of the mechanism plate main body 141 by an attachment screw 170 a. . The full switch 158 is inserted through an opening 171 formed in the lower passage cover body 170 and can be fixed at a predetermined position with a mounting screw 158a.

  An interface board box 103 a that accommodates the interface board 103 is attached to an attachment boss 722 that protrudes from the lower passage cover body 170 with an attachment screw 103 b at the upper right of the lower passage cover body 170. Below the interface board box 103a, a wiring passage 721b, which is a passage for accommodating wiring connected to the interface board 103, is formed. On the side of the wiring passage 721b, a wiring retainer 721c for holding the wiring is attached to an attachment boss 721d projecting from the lower passage cover body 170 with attachment screws 721e.

  A step portion is formed in the upper portion of the interface board box 103a, and a guide protrusion member 723 is attached to the front side of the step portion by an attachment screw 723a. The guide protrusion member 723 faces the upper plate communication port 713.

  On the left side of the surplus ball passage 711 of the lower plate 144, an engagement piece that engages with an engagement hole 123a formed in the payout control board box 123, and an engagement hole (not shown) formed in the power supply board box 122 An attachment lever 126 having an engagement piece to be engaged with is attached to be slidable up and down. After the engaging piece on the upper side of the mounting lever 126 is inserted into the engaging hole 123 a of the payout control board box 123 and the engaging piece on the lower side of the mounting lever 126 is inserted into the engaging hole of the power supply board box 122. Then, the mounting lever 126 is slid downward. As a result, the payout control board box 123 is fastened to the back side of the lower passage cover body 170, that is, one lower side of the mechanism plate 140. The power supply board box 122 is fixed to the left side of the lower plate 144. The payout control board box 123 and the power supply board box 122 can be removed by sliding the mounting lever 126 upward. In the present embodiment, a shield sheet metal member 121 is provided between the power supply board box 122 and the lower plate 144. Thereby, it is possible to block between the power supply board box 122 and the launch control board 107 and the launch motor 601 provided on the front side of the power supply board box 122. That is, the magnetic field generated when the power supply board 910 is turned on affects the launch control board 107, the launch motor 601 and the like disposed on the front side thereof, thereby preventing malfunction and destruction. can do.

  The power supply board box 122 accommodates a power supply board 910 that generates a plurality of power supplies having different voltages. The power supply board 910 includes a power switch for turning on / off the entire ball game machine 1, a clear switch 921 (see FIG. 26) for clearing all operations of the ball game machine 1, a tube fuse, and the like. Has been implemented. The power supply board 910 is mounted with a power connector to which the power cord 117 is connected. The power cord 117 connected to the power connector is connected to the left side plate 143 along the wiring passage formed on the front side of the mechanism plate main body 141 from the wiring passage opening 166 formed on the side of the frame external terminal plate 102. The mechanism plate 140 is passed through to the lower part of the mechanism plate 140 and drawn out from the opening provided in the mechanism plate main body 141 to the back side of the mechanism plate main body 141 and connected to the power connector. The voltage supplied by the power cord 117 is a voltage of AC24V, and the plurality of voltages generated by the power supply board 910 are four types of DC30V, DC24V, DC12V, and DC5V. (However, AC 24V is also supplied to other boards.) Further, the power supply board 910 has RAMs of the boards 120 and 98 while the drive power is not supplied to the CPUs of the main board 120 and the payout control board 98. In order to back up (hold) the stored contents, backup power is supplied to each of the boards 120 and 98. The main board 120 is configured to perform a backup process by outputting a power-off signal from the power board 910. The payout control board 98 is similarly backed up. The backup processing on the main board 120 and the payout control board 98 will be described in detail later.

  On the front side of the mechanism plate main body 141 of the lower right component (the side in contact with the game board 40), a winning ball guiding passage (not shown) for guiding a winning ball and an out ball passage (not shown) for guiding an out ball. And are formed. Above the winning ball guiding passage is a winning ball dropping entrance 740 for receiving a winning ball released from the winning ball guiding cover body 82, and the winning ball guiding passage receives the received winning ball. It is guided toward one side, led from a communication port (not shown) formed in the mechanism plate main body 141 to the back side of the mechanism plate main body 141, and further guided from the communication port to the downstream portion 712 of the ball extraction passage. It has become. The ball removal passage downstream portion 712 is bent in an inverted L shape along the outer peripheral edge of the lower right portion constituting portion, and is formed on the right side of the excess ball passage 711 formed on the substantially rear side of the lower constituting portion. Finally, it merges into the merged discharge passage 741. Therefore, the winning ball received from the winning ball dropping entrance 740 is guided to the outside of the ball game machine 1 through the winning ball guiding passage, the communication port, the ball discharging passage downstream portion 712, and the confluence discharging passage 741. It has become. The winning ball guiding passage has a mechanism plate main body 141 on the back surface thereof, but has a front surface formed of a closing plate 386 to be described later attached to the front frame 3.

  The out ball passage is formed below the concave portion 742 formed on the side of the winning ball drop entrance 740 so as to overlap with the winning ball guiding passage in the vertical direction, and communicates with the mechanism plate main body 141 at the lower end thereof. A mouth is opened and communicates with a confluence discharge passage 741 formed on the back side of the lower plate 144. The concave portion 742 described above is for housing a game board locking lever 366 attached to substantially the center of the lower part of the game board storage frame part 393 in order to fix the lower part of the game board 40 from the back surface.

  Accordingly, the out ball taken in from the out port 69 of the game board 40 is guided to an out ball discharge passage (not shown) engraved on the back surface of the game board 40, and further, a lower plate of the game board storage frame 393 is provided. It is guided to the above-described out ball passage through an out ball communication port 333 (see FIG. 16) formed in the shape portion, and is guided to the outside of the ball game machine 1 through the communication port and the junction discharge passage 741. In other words, the above-described merged discharge passage 741 joins all the extracted balls from the ball extraction passage downstream portion 712, the out balls from the out ball passage, and the winning balls from the winning ball guide passage to the outside of the ball game machine 1. It is something to guide.

  Next, the structure of the ball dispensing device 154 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. 6 is a perspective view of the ball dispensing device 154, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the ball dispensing device 154.

  The case 155 of the ball dispensing device 154 is formed by assembling a left outer case 155a, a right outer case 155c, and a case 155b between the case 155a and the case 155c from the case 155c side with the mounting screw 71. It is comprised so that it may become. These cases 155a, 155b, and 155c are molded of polycarbonate resin in order to improve wear resistance.

  A ball is dispensed between the case 155a and the case 155b by rotating with a partition plate 72 made of ABS resin (conductive synthetic resin) containing 8% by weight of carbon and a shaft 73 as a rotation axis. A ball dispensing member 74 (a rotating member driven by a motor such as a screw or a sprocket), a dispensing number count switch 116 for detecting a ball dispensed by the rotation of the ball dispensing member 74, and a dispensing relay board 113 Is provided.

  Ball supply passage members 77a and 77b for guiding the balls guided by the ball passage cover member 156 to the ball dispensing member 74 are provided upright inside the case 155a and the case 155b. A ball supply passage for guiding the balls to the ball dispensing member 74 is formed by the inner walls of the ball supply passage members 77a and 77b and the cases 155a and 155b. In addition, a partition plate 72 is provided in the ball supply passage, and two passages are formed corresponding to each of the left and right two rows of ball passages 188 and 189. Thereby, the partition plate 72 and the ball | bowl in a ball | bowl supply channel | path can be electrically connected. The partition plate 72 is provided with a protruding portion 72a so that when the case 155a and the case 155b are assembled, a protruding portion is formed at the upper portion of the case. The ball dispensing member 74 divides and dispenses the balls supplied from the ball supply passage one by one. The ball dispensing member 74 in the present embodiment is formed with a disk portion, and a plurality of (three) projecting portions are formed on both side surfaces of the disk portion so as to protrude while holding intervals for receiving balls. Thus, a space between each protrusion is formed as a recess for receiving and guiding balls.

  Further, ball guide passage members 84a and 84b for guiding the balls discharged by the ball discharge member 74 to the ball discharge port 84 are provided on the inner side of the case 155a and the case 155b. A ball discharge passage that guides the ball to the ball discharge port 84 is formed by the inner walls of the ball guide passage members 84a and 84b and the cases 155a and 155b. The ball payout passage is not provided with the partition plate 72, and the ball passages having a width corresponding to two rows on the left and right sides are inclined in the center to have a width corresponding to one row (a width in which one ball flows down).

  The payout number count switch 116 is provided in the ball discharge port 84 and detects a ball paid out by the ball payout member 74. Accordingly, the number of balls actually discharged from the ball payout device 154 can be counted based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 116. The ball outlet 84 in the present embodiment is composed of one outlet, and includes a ball outlet that discharges the balls discharged from the ball dispensing device 154 as a rental ball and a prize ball outlet that discharges as a prize ball. It is configured in a combined form. The payout relay board 113 is attached to the case 155b by an attaching screw 113a. In the case 155a, a connection recess is formed in which a connector through opening for connecting the payout relay board 113 and the wiring is formed.

  Next, between the case 155b and the case 155c, a payout motor 115 for rotationally driving the ball payout member 74, and a gear 79 for transmitting the power from the payout motor 115 to the ball payout member 74, An insulating cover 83 formed of an insulating material provided between the ball supply passage in the ball dispensing device 154 and the dispensing motor 115, and a dispensing sensor substrate 114 are provided.

  The payout motor 115 is configured to be integrated with the mounting plate 115a. A mounting hole 115b is formed in the mounting plate 115a. The case 155b is formed with an opening facing the payout motor 115 and an attachment portion 115c. The payout motor 115 is mounted in the case 155b by inserting the mounting portion 115c provided in the case 155b into the mounting hole 115b provided in the mounting plate 115.

  The insulating cover 83 includes a shielding portion 83a that shields between the ball supply passage and the dispensing motor 115, an opening facing the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 115, and a mounting hole corresponding to the mounting portion 115c provided in the case 155b. It is comprised from the formed attachment part 83b. The insulating cover 83 is mounted in the case 155b by inserting the mounting portion 115c provided in the case 155b into the mounting hole provided in the mounting portion 83b from above the mounting plate 115a of the payout motor 115.

  The gear 79 is attached so as to engage with a gear attached to the rotation shaft of the payout motor 115 by fitting one end of the rotation shaft of the ball payout member 74 into a fitting hole 79a formed at the center thereof. . Thereby, the power from the payout motor 115 can be transmitted to the ball payout member 74 via the gear 79. Therefore, by driving the payout motor 115, the ball payout member 74 can be rotated. A plurality of detection protrusions 79b are provided on one side of the gear 79 along the outer periphery. Six detection protrusions 79b in the present embodiment are provided on one side of the gear 79.

  The payout sensor substrate 114 is attached to the case 155c by an attachment screw 114a. When the payout sensor board 114 is attached to the case 155c, the motor position sensor provided on the payout sensor board 114 stops the payout motor 115 in order to reliably perform the ball payout operation (more precisely, the rotation of the payout sensor board 114). The stop position of the ball dispensing member 74 as a member) can be detected. The motor position sensor detects the rotational position of the ball dispensing member 74 when a plurality of detection projections 79b projecting from one side of the gear 79 cross.

  The ball dispensing device 154 according to the present embodiment converts the second article into the first article, but may dispense the second article (multiple articles) with the second article (multiple articles). Article 2 may be changed to Article 1 after making Article 2 into Article 1. However, in the present embodiment, the reason for receiving in Article 2 is to improve the payout speed, and the purpose of making it 1 is to reduce the cost by reducing the number of count switches.

  In addition, a rotation shaft insertion hole 155d through which the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 115 is inserted is formed on the side surface of the case 155c of the ball dispensing device 154 in the present embodiment. Thereby, the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 115 can be manually rotated. Therefore, the balls remaining on the ball dispensing member 74 can be taken out by manually rotating the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 115.

  FIG. 8 is a schematic cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 2 for explaining a state before the ball dispensing device 154 is attached to the ball dispensing device attachment portion 154a and a state after the ball dispensing device 154 is attached. The schematic cross-sectional view in FIG. 8 is a cross-sectional view of the vicinity of the ball dispensing device mounting portion 154a from the left side when viewed from the front of the ball game machine 1.

  A ball stopper member 159 attached downstream of the ball passage cover member 156 is inserted into an insertion hole 156e formed in the ball passage cover member 156 corresponding to each of the ball passages 188 and 189 to stop the flow of the ball 2 One stopper piece and a stopper member 159b integrally formed with a contact portion that comes into contact with the case 155 of the ball dispensing device 154, and the stopper member 159b are biased so that the stopper piece is inserted into the insertion hole 156e. And a mounting member 159c for mounting the stopper member 159b to the ball path cover member 156.

  Fig.8 (a) is a schematic sectional drawing in BB for demonstrating the state before attaching the ball delivery apparatus 154 to the ball delivery apparatus attaching part 154a. When the ball dispensing device 154 is not attached to the ball dispensing device mounting portion 154a, the stopper piece of the stopper member 159b is inserted into the insertion hole 156e by the elastic force of the spring as shown in FIG. It will be in a state to let you. That is, the ball is not supplied to the ball supply passage of the ball dispensing device 154.

  FIG. 8B is a schematic cross-sectional view at BB for explaining a state when the ball dispensing device 154 is attached to the ball dispensing device attachment portion 154a. When the ball dispensing device 154 is attached to the ball dispensing device mounting portion 154a, the ball stopper member 159b comes into contact with the protrusion 72a provided on the partition plate 72 of the ball dispensing device 154 as shown in FIG. When the parts are in contact and pushed upward against the elastic force of the spring, the stopper piece of the integrally formed ball stopper member 159b is retracted from the insertion hole, and the ball can flow down the ball passages 188 and 189. become. That is, the ball can be supplied to the ball supply passage of the ball dispensing device 154.

  By mounting such a ball stopper member 159 downstream of the ball passage cover member 156, even when the ball dispensing device 154 is removed from the ball dispensing device mounting portion 154a, the ball located upstream from the insertion hole 156e. Will not spill out. For this reason, for example, when exchanging the ball dispensing device 154, it is possible to save the trouble of performing the ball removal operation and removing all the balls stored in the prize ball tank 147 and the ball alignment rail member 148.

  On the other hand, when the ball dispensing device 154 is attached to the ball dispensing device mounting portion 154a, the stopper piece of the ball stopper member 159b is retracted from the insertion hole so that the ball can flow down the ball passages 188 and 189, and the ball stopper member Since 159 and the projection 72a of the partition plate 72 are in contact with each other, the partition plate 72 and the ball stopper member 159 can be electrically connected.

  FIG. 9 is a connection diagram of the reinforcing hinge member 176, the prize ball tank 147, the ball alignment rail member 148, the ball passage cover member 156, the ball stopper member 159, and the partition plate 72 attached to the mechanism plate 140.

  The partition plate 72 is made of ABS resin containing 8% by weight of carbon. When the ball dispensing device 154 is attached to the ball dispensing device mounting portion 154a, as shown in FIG. 8 (b), the partition plate 72 has a ball stopper member due to the direct contact between the projection 72a and the stopper member 159b. 159 is electrically connected.

  The ball stopper member 159 is made of stainless steel. The ball stopper member 159 is electrically connected to the ball passage cover member 156 because the ball stopper member 159 is attached to the lower portion of the ball passage cover member 156 by an attachment screw 159a.

  The ball passage cover member 156 is made of an ABS resin containing 8% by weight of carbon. The ball passage cover member 156 is electrically connected to the ball alignment rail member 148 when the mounting piece 156c and the mounting piece 148d are in direct contact with each other.

  The ball alignment rail member 148 is made of ABS resin containing 8% by weight of carbon. The ball alignment rail member 148 is electrically connected to the prize ball tank 147 when the connection hole 148b and the attachment piece 147a are in direct contact with each other.

  The prize ball tank 147 is connected to the reinforcing hinge member 176 by wiring as described above and is grounded.

  Therefore, the potentials of the reinforcing hinge member 176, the prize ball tank 147, the ball alignment rail member 148, the ball passage cover member 156, the ball stopper member 159, and the partition plate 72 are all the same and are at the ground level. Thereby, electrification of the balls in contact with the prize ball tank 147, the ball alignment rail member 148, the ball passage cover member 156, and the partition plate 72 can be prevented.

As clearly shown in FIG. 9, the conductive positions of the metal balls (in the above example, the prize ball tank 147, the ball alignment rail member 148, the ball passage cover member 156, and the partition plate 72) are electrically conductive. ABS resin is used and is indirectly grounded. As a conventional countermeasure against static electricity noise, there was a method of providing a metal ground plate at a position in contact with the ball, but according to such a method, when the charged ball contacts the ground plate, it suddenly discharges, There was a possibility of giving electromagnetic interference as an electrostatic noise to the electronic circuit in the control board installed in the gaming machine. However, if the conductive ABS resin is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the balls as in the above embodiment, the occurrence of a sudden discharge is alleviated and the electronic circuit in the control board is reduced. The possibility of electromagnetic interference is eliminated. For example, since the specific resistance of the carbon-containing synthetic resin is about 10 ⁵ to 10 ⁷ Ω · cm, which is larger than that of metal, rapid discharge does not occur.

  Next, the configuration of the front door frame 4 and various components attached to the front door frame 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the front door frame 4 from the back, FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the frame base 4a from the back, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit 22 from the back. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the left decorative unit 23a and the right decorative unit 24a from the back, and FIG. 14 shows the left decorative lamp member 33 provided in correspondence with the left decorative unit 23a from the front, and the right It is a disassembled perspective view of the right decoration lamp member 34 provided corresponding to the decoration unit 24a.

  The configuration of the front door frame 4 will be described with reference to FIG. The front door frame 4 is configured by mounting various members on the front side and the back side of a metal frame base 4a. On the front side of the frame base 4a, there is an upper decorative unit 22 on the upper side, a left decorative unit 23a on the left side, a right decorative unit 24a on the right side, and a transparent window covering that covers the front side of the transparent window 18 on the lower side. Lower decorative cover members 31 to which the members are attached are each attached with an attachment screw. Further, on the back side of the frame base 4a, upper wiring cover members 35a and 35b having wiring pressing members attached to the upper left and right sides thereof, a left decorative lamp member 33 on the left side, and a right decorative lamp member 34 on the right side. The lower wiring cover member 35c with the wiring pressing member attached to the lower part is attached with an attachment screw.

  The frame base 4a will be described with reference to FIG. The frame base 4a has a structure in which the outer periphery of a substantially rectangular flat plate made of metal is folded back to form a reinforcing peripheral frame rib 199 to prevent rattling.

  A substantially circular opening 5a for the circular see-through window 5 is formed in the center of the frame base 4a. In addition, a rear insertion hole 5b through which a rear portion of the lamp substrates 191a, 191b, 191c and the like provided therein is inserted is formed on the upper portion of the frame base 4a so that the upper decoration unit 22 can be mounted. Yes. In addition, openings 5d facing the speakers 12a and 12b are formed on the upper left and right sides of the frame base 4a so that sound emitted from the speakers 12a and 12b can be passed to the front side. Further, below the opening 5d, a wiring through hole 5c is formed for passing wiring from the lamp substrates 191a, 191b, 191c to the rear surface side. The wiring passed from the wiring through hole 5c to the rear side is passed to the upper left side of the frame base 4a by the wiring pressing member attached to the upper wiring cover members 35a and 35b. In addition, an opening 5g facing the ball-out LED 9 or the prize ball LED 10 is formed at a position inside the wiring through hole 5c, and light emitted from the ball-off LED 9 or the prize ball LED 10 can be passed to the front side. It is configured as follows.

  Moreover, the opening 5e which the game effect lamps 16a and 17a attached to the left decoration lamp member 33 and the right decoration lamp member 34 face is formed in the left and right sides of the frame base 4a, and the game effect lamps 16a and 17a. It is comprised so that the light emitted from can be let through to the front side. Further, an invoice confirmation hole 5f is formed in the lower part of the frame base 4a so that the indicia attached to the game board 40 can be seen from the see-through window 18 formed in the lower decorative cover member 31.

  The frame base 4a includes an upper decorative unit 22, a left decorative unit 23a, a right decorative unit 24a, a lower decorative cover member 31, upper wiring cover members 35a and 35b, a left decorative lamp member 33, a right decorative lamp member 34, and a lower portion. A plurality of holes for inserting attachment screws for attaching the wiring cover member 35c are formed.

  Note that an upper hinge fitting 45 and a lower hinge fitting 46 are attached to the upper and lower sides of the frame base 4a on the side of the shaft support so that the frame base 4a can be freely opened and closed on the front upper portion of the front frame 3. The upper hinge bracket 45 includes an L-shaped shaft support pin 45a, a shaft pressing member 45b provided with an insertion hole through which one end of the shaft support pin 45a can be inserted, and the other end of the shaft support pin 45a facing upward. And a mounting screw 45d for mounting the shaft pressing member 45b to the frame base 4a. The upper hinge fitting 45 is normally in a state in which one end of the shaft support pin 45a passes through the insertion hole provided in the shaft pressing member 45b and protrudes from the upper portion of the shaft pressing member 45b by the biasing force of the spring 45d. It attaches to the frame base | substrate 4a so that it may become. The end portion of the pivot pin 45a protruding from the insertion hole is inserted into an insertion hole 312a drilled at the lower end of the horizontal portion of the frame base upper hinge 311 described later (see FIG. 16). The lower hinge fitting 46 is attached to the frame base 4a by a rivet 46b. The lower hinge fitting 46 is provided with a shaft support hole 46a. A shaft support pin 319 of a frame lower hinge 318, which will be described later, is inserted into the shaft support hole 46a of the lower hinge metal fitting 46 (see FIG. 16). Thus, in the present embodiment, the end portion of the pivot pin 45a protruding from the insertion hole is inserted into the insertion hole 312a of the frame base upper hinge 311 and the lower frame hinge to the pivot support hole 46a of the lower hinge metal fitting 46. By inserting the shaft support pin 319 of the frame 318, the frame base 4a can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 3 around the insertion hole 312a of the frame base upper hinge 311 and the shaft support pin 319 of the frame lower hinge 318. Is pivotally supported.

  In addition, an engagement member 64 including an engagement piece that can be engaged with an opening / closing frame hook portion 382 of the locking device 128, which will be described later, is attached by a rivet 64a above and below the right side of the frame base 4a. Accordingly, by rotating the cylinder lock 26 in one direction, the hook portion 382 for the opening / closing frame is moved downward to engage with the engagement piece of the engagement member 64 attached to the upper and lower sides of the back side of the frame base 4a. And the front door frame 4 can be released from the front frame 3.

  Next, the upper decoration unit 22 will be described with reference to FIG. The upper decoration unit 22 mainly includes lamp boards 191a, 191b, 191c, an upper decoration unit base 22a to which the lamp boards 191a, 191b, 191c are attached, and game effect lamps 13a provided on the lamp boards 191a, 191b, 191c. And a protective cover 271 that covers the game effect lamps 13a, 13b, 13c and the reflection member 270.

  First, the reflecting member 270 will be described. The reflection member 270 includes a main area 270a where a lamp recess is formed where the game effect lamp 13a faces and a sub area 270b where the game effect lamps 13b and 13c and the speakers 12a and 12b face.

  The main region 270a is silver-plated over the entire front surface in order to easily reflect the light from the game effect lamp 13a to the front surface. Further, the main region 270a is formed so that the entire surface on the front side has a complicated uneven shape. On the surface, lamp concave portions that are hemispherical are formed by the number of game effect lamps 13a. A lamp hole 275a is formed in the center of each lamp recess so that the game effect lamp 13a can be faced. A curved portion 280 is formed in the main region 270a so as to surround the lamp recess facing the game effect lamp 13a. Subregions 270b are formed on the left and right sides of the curved portion 280.

  The sub-region 270b is provided with speaker holes 275c facing the speakers 12a and 12b, and further provided with lamp holes 275b facing the game effect lamps 13b and 13c so as to sandwich the speaker holes 275c therebetween.

  Next, the protective cover 271 will be described. The protective cover 271 attaches the main area cover 271a covering the front surface of the main area 270a of the reflecting member 270, the sub area cover 271b covering the front surface of the sub area 270b of the reflecting member 270, and the sub area cover 271b to the rear surface side. The cover is composed of an attachment cover 271c for attaching the reflection member 270 to the upper decorative unit base 22a.

  First, the main area cover 271a is formed of a transparent and transparent synthetic resin that can visually recognize the main area 270a (for example, it may be lightly colored) and covers the entire main area 270a. It has a shape to do. A mounting boss 260 is formed at a curved portion to be fitted to the curved portion 280 so that the mounting boss 260 can be attached from the rear surface side of the curved portion 280. The inner surface of the main area cover 271a is subjected to a light diffusion process for diffusing light from the game effect lamp 13a to the front side. The light diffusion process in the present embodiment is, for example, a knurling process applied to the inner surface of the main area cover 271a or a light diffusion sheet attached to the inner surface of the main area cover 271a.

  Next, the sub area cover 271b and the mounting cover 271c will be described. The sub-region cover 271b is made of a synthetic resin that is colorless and transparent and can transmit the sub-region 270b. In addition, the sub-region cover 271b allows light from the speakers 12a and 12b to pass through the front side, and the light from the game effect lamps 13b and 13c to the front side. And a region where light diffusion treatment for diffusing is performed. The sub-region cover 271b is formed with an insertion hole 262 through which an attachment screw 263 used for attachment to the rear surface side of the attachment cover 271c is inserted. The sub-region cover 271b is attached to the rear surface side of the attachment cover 271c by inserting the attachment screw 263 through the insertion hole 262 and screwing it.

  The mounting cover 271c is formed of a colored (for example, white) synthetic resin. On the rear surface side of the attachment cover 271c, an attachment boss 264 for attaching the sub-region cover 271b, an attachment boss 265 used for attaching the attachment cover 271c to the front side of the upper decoration unit base 22a, and the upper decoration unit 22 And an attachment boss 266 used for attaching the frame to the front side of the frame base 4a.

  Next, the upper decoration unit base 22a will be described. The upper decoration unit base 22a has lamp holes 275a ', 275b' and speaker holes 275c 'at positions corresponding to the lamp holes 275a, 275b and speaker holes 275c formed in the reflecting member 270, respectively. Further, on the rear surface side of the upper decorative unit base 22a, a mounting boss 268 for mounting the lamp substrates 191a, 191b, 191c with mounting screws 267 and a mounting screw 269 are inserted and screwed to the mounting boss 265 of the mounting cover 271c. An insertion hole 265a is formed for this purpose. The reflective member 270 is formed with a through hole 265b through which the mounting boss 265 of the mounting cover 271c passes.

  First, the mounting configuration on the front side of the upper decorative unit base 22a will be described. A main area cover 271 a is attached to the front side of the reflecting member 270 with an attaching screw 261. Further, the sub area cover 271b is attached to the rear surface side of the attachment cover 271c with the attachment screw 263. Then, on the front side of the upper decorative unit base 22a, it is assembled by being screwed to the mounting boss 265 of the mounting cover 271c through which the through hole 265b of the reflecting member 270 is passed with the mounting screw 269. A lamp seal 281 is sandwiched between the rear surface side of the reflecting member 270 and the front surface side of the upper decorative unit base 22a.

  Next, a mounting configuration on the rear surface side of the upper decoration unit base 22a will be described. The lamp boards 191a, 191b, 191c are screwed by the mounting screws 267 so that the game effect lamps 13a, 13b, 13c are inserted into the lamp holes 275a ′, 275b ′ formed in the upper decoration unit base 22a. Assembled. In addition, on the rear surface side of the lamp substrate 191a, a substrate sheet 282 in which a hole through which the rear portion of the lamp substrate 191a is inserted is also attached by an attachment screw 267.

  The left decoration unit 23a and the right decoration unit 24a will be described with reference to FIG. Since the left decoration unit 23a and the right decoration unit 24a are substantially symmetrical with each other, the left decoration unit 23a will be described as a representative.

  The left decorative unit 23a includes a left decorative unit base 231 serving as a base member, a left reflecting member 232 that reflects light from the game effect lamp 16a and the prize ball LED 10 provided on the lamp substrate 192a to the front side, and a game effect lamp. The left light diffusion member 233 for diffusing the light from 16a to the front side and the left protective cover 234 for covering the left light diffusion member 233 are configured.

  First, the left reflecting member 232 will be described. The left reflecting member 232 includes a left game effect lamp area 232a in which a lamp recess is formed where the game effect lamp 16a faces and a prize ball LED area 232b where the prize ball LED 10 faces.

  The left game effect lamp region 232a is silver-plated over the entire front surface in order to easily reflect the light from the game effect lamp 16a to the front surface. Further, the left game effect lamp region 232a is formed in a complicated uneven shape on the entire front surface. On the surface, lamp concave portions that are hemispherical are formed by the number of game effect lamps 16a. And the lamp hole 232c is provided in the center of each lamp | ramp recessed part, and the game effect lamp | ramp 16a faces. On the other hand, the award ball LED region 232b is provided with a lamp hole 232d where the award ball LED 10 faces.

  Next, the left light diffusion member 233 and the left protective cover 234 will be described. The left light diffusing member 233 and the left protective cover 234 are formed of a colorless, transparent and translucent synthetic resin that allows the left reflecting member 232 to be visually recognized. The shape is covered. Further, the surface of the left light diffusing member 233 is subjected to a light diffusion process for diffusing light from the game effect lamp 16a to the front side. An attachment boss 234 a used to attach the left protection cover 234 to the front side of the left decorative unit base 231 is formed on the rear surface side of the left protection cover 234.

  Next, the left decoration unit base 231 will be described. The left decorative unit base 231 has lamp holes 232c 'and 232d' formed at positions corresponding to the lamp holes 232c and 232d formed in the left reflecting member 232, respectively. In addition, on the rear surface side of the left decorative unit base 231, an insertion hole 231b for inserting the mounting screw 231a and screwing it to the mounting boss 234a of the left protective cover 234, or the left decorative unit base 231 is mounted on the front surface of the frame base 4a. A mounting boss 231c used for mounting on the side is formed. The left reflecting member 232 is formed with an insertion hole 231b 'similar to the insertion hole 231b of the left decorative unit base 231. The left light diffusion member 233 has a through hole 233a through which the mounting boss 234a of the left protective cover 234 passes.

  First, a mounting configuration on the front side of the left decorative unit base 231 will be described. First, the through hole 233a of the left light diffusing member 233 is fitted into the mounting boss 234a of the left protective cover 234, and further, the left protective cover 234 and the left reflective member 232 are aligned so that the insertion hole 231b ′ of the left reflective member 232 matches. The left light diffusion member 233 is sandwiched and combined. Then, it is assembled to the front side of the left decorative unit base 231 by being screwed onto the mounting boss 234a of the left protective cover 234 with the mounting screw 231a.

  Next, the left decorative lamp member 33 and the right decorative lamp member 34 will be described with reference to FIG. Since the left decorative lamp member 33 and the right decorative lamp member 34 are substantially symmetrical with each other, the left decorative lamp member 33 will be described as a representative.

  The left decorative lamp member 33 includes a lamp board 192a, a left board sheet 194 attached to the front side of the lamp board 192a, and a left board protection cover 195 that protects the rear side of the lamp board 192a.

  The left substrate protection cover 195 is provided with a rear insertion hole 195a through which the rear portion of the lamp substrate 192a is inserted, and a mounting boss 195b at a lower position. Insertion holes 192c and 194b for inserting the mounting screws 194a are respectively provided below the lamp substrate 192a and the left substrate sheet 194. The left board sheet 194 has a hole through which the game effect lamp 16a mounted on the lamp board 192a is inserted. The left decorative lamp member 33 is attached to the front surface side of the left board protection cover 195 by inserting the lamp board 192a and the left board sheet 194 with the mounting screws 194a. The left decorative lamp member 33 assembled integrally is inserted into the lamp hole 232c of the left decorative unit 23a corresponding to the game effect lamp 16a, and is attached to the frame base 4a from the rear surface side with an attaching screw.

  Next, the configuration of the front frame 3 and various components attached to the front frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view from the front of the front frame 3, and FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view from the back of the front frame 3.

  The front frame 3 is integrally formed of synthetic resin. As shown in FIG. 15, the transparent plate holding frame corresponding plate portion 300 corresponding to the upper front door frame 4, the lower plate 27, the ashtray unit 29, And a lower plate corresponding plate portion 301 corresponding to the operation handle 30. The transparent plate holding frame corresponding plate portion 300 and the lower plate corresponding plate portion 301 are formed with a slight level difference, and a game area 41 of the game board 40 is provided at substantially the center of the transparent plate holding frame corresponding plate portion 300. Is opened.

  The opening 302 is formed in a substantially circular shape, and on one lower side thereof, there is a certificate opening 303 for receiving a certificate for various groups to be attached to the lower side of the game board 40. In addition, a speaker mounting portion 248a for mounting the speaker 12a is mounted on the upper left side of the transparent plate holding frame corresponding plate portion 300, and a speaker mounting for mounting the speaker 12b is mounted on the upper right side of the transparent plate holding frame corresponding plate portion 300. A concave speaker opening is formed from the front surface of the front frame 3 toward the back surface at the center of the speaker mounting portions 248a, 248b. The speaker 12a, 12b can be attached.

  Below the speaker mounting portion 248a on the front surface side of the front frame 3, a prize ball LED substrate mounting portion 219 to which the prize ball LED substrate 198 on which the prize ball LED 10 is mounted is mounted. The prize ball LED board 198 is attached to the prize ball LED board mounting part 219 with a mounting screw 198a in combination so that the prize ball LED 10 matches the cylindrical part of the prize ball board cover 219a. The prize ball board cover 219a is formed with a protruding mounting boss, and a wiring presser 219b for holding the wiring is attached by a mounting screw 219c.

  Further, below the speaker mounting portion 248b on the front surface side of the front frame 3, a ball-cut LED substrate mounting portion 218 to which the ball-cut LED substrate 197 on which the ball-cut LED 9 is mounted is attached is formed. The ball-cut LED substrate 197 is attached to the ball-cut LED substrate mounting portion 218 with mounting screws 197a in combination so that the ball-cut LED 9 matches the tube portion of the ball-cut substrate cover 218a.

  The front plate relay board 100 is located on the right side of the speaker 12a, and is attached to the board mounting boss 247 protruding from the upper surface side of the front frame 3 by the mounting screw 100a. It is attached to the lower right side by a mounting screw 258a.

  Further, a frame lower hinge mounting surface 317 for mounting the frame lower hinge 318 is provided below one side of the transparent plate holding frame corresponding plate part 300, and a lower dish frame is provided below the frame lower hinge mounting surface 317. A lower tray frame hinge mounting surface 321 for mounting the hinge 322 is formed.

  In addition to the frame lower hinge 318 being attached to the frame lower hinge attachment surface 317, a frame lower hinge presser 318a is attached to the rear surface side of the frame lower hinge 318 by an attachment screw 320. The lower dish frame hinge 322 is attached to the lower dish frame hinge attachment surface 321 by an attachment screw 324.

  The lower frame hinge 318 is formed by being bent into an L shape, and a shaft support pin 319 is inserted at the front end of the bent horizontal portion. The shaft support pin 319 is inserted into the front door frame. 4 is inserted into the shaft support hole 46a of the lower hinge metal fitting 46 provided in 4. The front door frame 4 is pivotally supported with respect to the front frame 3 so as to be openable and closable around the pivot pin 319 and an insertion hole 312a drilled in a metal frame base upper hinge 311 described later. The upper pan opening / closing frame 11 is pivotally supported with respect to the front frame 3 around the pivot pin 319 and an insertion hole 322a formed in the lower pan frame hinge 322.

  On the other hand, a security groove 487 is formed on the outer periphery excluding the lower side of the transparent plate holding frame corresponding plate portion 300. The security groove 487 is for inserting a security stand piece of the reinforcing security bracket of the front door frame 4. When the front door frame 4 is closed, the security stand piece is allowed to enter the security groove 487, It is possible to prevent fraud in which a thin wire such as a piano wire is inserted from the boundary between the door frame 4 and the front frame 3.

  In addition, hook communication holes (not shown) are formed in the upper and lower portions adjacent to the open side security groove 487. The hook communication hole penetrates an opening / closing frame hook portion of the locking device 128 described later, and the opening / closing frame hook portion protruding forward from the hook communication hole engages / disengages with an engagement piece (described later) of the front door frame 4. To get.

  A decorative member attachment surface 757 to which the cylinder lock decorative member 32 is attached is formed below the opening side transparent plate holding frame corresponding plate portion 300. A mounting hole 355 through which a mounting screw 356 for mounting the cylinder lock decorative member 32 is inserted is formed in the decorative member mounting surface 757, and a cylinder through which the cylinder lock 26 is inserted is located to the right of the upper mounting hole 355. A lock hole 758 is drilled. A cylinder lock hole 354 is also formed in the cylinder lock decoration member 32 attached to the decoration member attachment surface 757.

  By the way, a recessed plate-like support plate portion 326 is formed in the back side portion of the transparent plate holding frame corresponding plate portion 300, and an upper plate outflow is provided on one side upper portion of the support plate portion 326. An opening 325 is formed, and a guide box member 342 is attached in front of the lower part of the upper plate outflow opening 325.

  In addition, a security rib 329a is provided above the upper plate outlet 325, and a security cover 329b is attached to the front side of the security rib 329a with a mounting screw 329c. In the space surrounded by the security ribs 329a and the security cover 329b, the back of the prize ball connecting rod 253 is fixed to the back of the prize ball payout opening 20 of the front door frame 4 with the front door frame 4 closed. The end portion can enter, so that an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is not inserted between the rear end of the prize ball connecting rod and the upper plate outflow opening 325. A protruding piece 331 extending rearward is provided on the upper surface of the rear end of the upper plate outflow opening 325, and this protruding piece 331 enters the upper plate communication port 713 of the mechanism plate 140 and receives a prize. An unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that is allowed to enter from the ball outlet 20 is prevented from entering from the gap between the front frame 3 and the mechanism plate 140.

  On the other hand, a security rib 329a is also extended forward on the upper portion of the support plate 326 opposite to the upper plate outlet 325. The security rib 329a is also used to prevent intrusion of unauthorized tools from the front door frame 4 and the side of the front frame 3.

  A rail connecting member 327a that comes into contact with the guide rail 42a attached to the game board 40 when the game board 40 is attached to the front frame 3 is provided on the upper part of the security rib 329a erected on the left side of the front frame 3. A mounting hole 323a for mounting the stub is formed. The rail connecting member 327a is formed by making an elongated stainless steel plate into an L shape and folding both ends in the same direction. The rail connection member 327a is attached by inserting the side folded back inside the L-shape into the attachment hole 323a (see FIG. 20).

  Similarly, when the game board 40 is attached to the front frame 3, a rail that comes into contact with the guide rail 42 b attached to the game board 40 when the game board 40 is attached to the front frame 3. An attachment hole 323b for attaching the connection member 327b is formed. The rail connecting member 327b is formed by making an elongated stainless steel plate into an L shape and folding both ends thereof in the same direction. The rail connection member 327b is attached by inserting the side folded back inside the L shape into the attachment hole 323b (see FIG. 20).

  Further, on the front surface of the support plate portion 326, a guide box member 342 and a firing rail 345 are attached to attachment holes 336a and 336b formed in the support plate portion 326, respectively, with attachment screws 344 and 351. The launch rail 345 places the hit balls supplied from the upper plate 19 and supplied one by one from the ball feeding member at the discharge position at the downstream end thereof. The hit ball is led to the guide rail 42a of the game board 40. A foul ball opening 399 is formed between the upstream end of the launch rail 345 and the downstream end of the guide rail 42 a of the game board 40, and the hit ball that has run backward on the guide rail 42 without reaching the game area 41. Is guided to the guide box member 342.

  The above-described launch rail 345 is configured by attaching a rail member 346 that forms a launch position of a ball and a guide piece 347 that guides the ball supplied from the upper plate 19 to the launch position, and attached to a mounting substrate 348. . The mounting board 348 includes a mounting boss for screwing the rail member 346, a mounting hole (both not shown) for screwing the guide piece 347, and a mounting screw for mounting the mounting board 348 to the support plate portion 326. A mounting hole 350 for stopping 351 is formed. The rail member 346 is made of stainless steel (SUS304BA, SUS301, 3 / 4H, etc.) bent into a square shape. Further, an insertion hole (not shown) for inserting the hitting ball rod 600 of the hitting ball launcher 130 is formed in the bent portion of the rail-shaped 346 of the rail member 346, and that portion forms the launch position of the ball. It is supposed to be. The rail member 346 made of stainless steel may be thinned and subjected to hard chrome plating on the surface thereof. In such a case, the material (stainless steel) can be made thin, leading to cost reduction. On the other hand, the guide piece 347 is made of a synthetic resin, so that the impact of the sphere at the time of supply is reduced, and the sphere is stabilized at the launch position.

  In addition, the guide box member 342 includes an overflow ball inlet 397 for receiving a prize ball overflowing from the upper plate outflow opening 325 when the front door frame 4 is opened, the foul ball port 399, and a ball from the upper plate 19 A ball inlet 398 for receiving the extracted balls, and the balls flowing in from the respective inlets are taken into a discharge port 335 formed in the support plate portion 326 and fixed to the lower part of the rear surface of the front frame 3. It guides to the lower plate 27 through the connecting rod 392. A launch ball guide plate 343 projects from one side of the upper side of the guide box member 342 and guides the hit ball running on the downstream end of the guide rail 42 of the game board 40 so as not to collide with the multilayer glass plate. .

  Further, the support plate portion 326 is provided with a wiring through opening 332 on the side of the guide box member 342 described above. In the wiring through opening 332, wiring from the electrical components and the like mounted on the balance display board 104 provided in the upper plate 19 and wiring from the electrical components provided in the front door frame 4 are gathered together. It leads to the back side.

  Further, an upper plate lock plate 352 is attached to the right side of the support plate portion 326 with an attachment screw 353. When the upper plate opening / closing frame 11 is closed, the upper plate lock plate 352 is for locking the upper plate lock locking piece.

  Further, the upper end side of the support plate portion 326 is formed so as to have substantially the same width as the game board 40 so that the game board 40 can be placed, but an out-ball communication port 333 is formed at substantially the center thereof. Has been.

  The structure of the transparent plate holding frame corresponding plate portion 300 of the front frame 3 is generally as described above. However, in the lower plate corresponding plate portion 301, a surplus sphere discharge port 338 is opened at substantially the center thereof, and on the shaft support side. An ashtray recess 337 is formed. The surplus ball discharge port 338 is an opening for paying out surplus prize balls to the lower tray 27, and the ashtray recess 337 is for allowing the ashtray unit 29 to rotate. The lower plate corresponding plate portion 301 is also formed with a number of lower plate mounting holes 339 for mounting the lower plate.

  On the other hand, in the rear surface structure of the front frame 3, as shown in FIG. 16, the game board storage frame portion 393 is integrally formed of synthetic resin. Thus, the game board storage frame portion 393 stores and supports the game board 40 inside and fixes the game board 40, and thus has a structure for supporting the game board 40 and parts for fixing the game board 40 accurately. The game board storage frame 393 also includes parts for accurately attaching a mechanism plate 140 provided on the back surface of the game board 40 and provided with various mechanisms for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls.

  A frame upper hinge attachment surface 305 for attaching the frame base upper hinge 311 is formed above one side of the rear surface of the front frame 3. The frame base upper hinge 311 is attached by screwing it onto the frame upper hinge attachment surface 305 from the back side of the front frame 3 with an attachment screw 313.

  The frame base upper hinge 311 is formed by being bent into a U-shape, and an insertion hole 312 is formed at the tip of the upper horizontal portion formed by bending. The shaft support pin of the upper hinge fitting of the frame 2 is inserted. An insertion hole 312a is formed at the tip of the lower horizontal portion, and the shaft support pin 45a of the upper hinge fitting 45 of the front door frame 4 is inserted into the insertion hole 312a.

  In addition, a front frame lower hinge 377 is attached to a mounting boss 370 by a mounting screw 379 at one lower end of the rear surface of the front frame 3. The front frame lower hinge 377 is for pivotally supporting the front frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 together with the frame base upper hinge 311 described above. The upper surface of the frame base upper hinge 311 and the lower surface of the front frame lower hinge 377 protrude forward, insertion holes 312 and 378 are formed in the protrusions, respectively, and the shaft fixed to the outer frame 2 in the insertion holes 312 and 378 The front support frame 3 is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed.

  In addition, on one side of the game board storage frame portion 393, a plastic frame hinge fitting 314 for pivotally supporting the mechanism plate 140 so as to be freely opened and closed is firmly fixed to the mounting boss 369 with mounting screws 316. The upper plastic frame hinge fitting 314 is fastened together with the mounting screw 316 from above the reinforcing fitting connecting member 314a. The reinforcing metal fitting connection member 314a is formed by making an elongated stainless steel plate into an L shape and folding one end outward.

  In addition, plastic frame reinforcing brackets 371a and 371b are fixed to the shaft support side of the rear surface of the front frame 3 by mounting screws 372a and 372b in order to prevent rattling. The plastic frame reinforcing bracket 371a is fastened with a mounting screw 372a from above the frame base upper hinge 311 so that the upper part thereof contacts the frame base upper hinge 311. Further, the plastic frame reinforcing metal fitting 371a is attached so as to come into contact with the rail connecting member 327a protruding from the back side of the attaching hole 323a and the reinforcing metal fitting connecting member 314a (see FIG. 20). Thereby, the upper plastic frame hinge metal fitting 314 is electrically connected to the plastic frame reinforcing metal fitting 371a via the reinforcing metal fitting connecting member 314a.

  On the open side of the back surface of the front frame 3, the locking device 128 is fixed to the mounting boss 363 with mounting screws 391. In addition, an attachment portion 374 for attaching a launcher contact member 373 that comes into contact with the hit ball launcher 130 when the hit ball launcher 130 is attached is formed below. The launcher contact member 373 is formed by folding back both ends of an elongated stainless steel plate. The launcher contact member 373 is attached to the attachment portion 374. The locking device 128 is attached so as to come into contact with the rail connection member 327b protruding from the back side of the attachment hole 323b and the launching device contact member 373. Thereby, the rail connection member 327b is electrically connected to the firing device contact member 373 via the locking device 128.

  The above-described locking device 128 has been conventionally used, and by rotating the cylinder lock 26 in one direction, the front frame hook 389 is moved upward and stopped on the inner side of the side plate of the outer frame 2. The front frame 3 can be released from the outer frame 2 by releasing the engagement with the hooking piece to be worn, and the front and rear frame hook portions 382 are moved downward by rotating the cylinder lock 26 in the other direction. The front door frame 4 can be released from the front frame 3 by releasing the engagement with the engagement pieces attached to the upper and lower sides of the door frame 4 on the rear surface opening side. The locking device 128 is provided with a glass frame opening lever 390 for releasing the engagement of the opening / closing frame hook portion with the front frame 3 opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

  In the game board storage structure, the lower part of the game board 40 is placed on the upper surface of the support plate 326 and positioned by the positioning protrusion 358, and the left and right sides of the game board storage frame 393 and the inner contact step 752 ( The game board 40 is stored in an accurate position by abutting and positioning by being regulated by the rib). An outer frame abutment rib 362 protrudes from the upper position. The outer frame abutment rib 362 narrows the distance between the outer frame 2 and the inner side of the front frame 3 to reduce the front frame 3. Thus, when the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, there is no backlash.

  Further, there are a plurality (four) of game board locking levers 366 and 753 as parts for fixing the game board 40. The game board locking lever 366 is pressed from the back side of the game board 40 by rotating in a state where the game board 40 is mounted in a lever mounting hole 360 formed at a position adjacent to the game board storage frame portion 393. The board 40 is firmly stored and supported and fixed in the game board storage frame 393. On the other hand, the game board locking lever 753 is fixed to the mounting boss 334 protruding from the pressing member mounting recess 357 of the support plate 326 with a mounting screw 367. A game board locking lever 366 is attached to the presser member mounting recess 357 for pressing and fixing the lower back portion of the game board 40 in the game board storage frame 393 and placing it on the upper side of the support plate 326. A mounting boss 334 is formed to project.

  Further, there are a plurality (three) of mechanism plate fixing protrusions 364 as parts for attaching the mechanism plate 140. Accordingly, one mechanism plate fixing protrusion 364 is detachably attached to the open side of the front frame 3 by a mounting screw 365 at the upper left side of the closing plate 386 that covers the back surface of the support plate portion 326. It is. The other two mechanism plate fixing protrusions 364 are detachably attached to the upper part on the open side and the upper side on the shaft support side with attachment screws 365.

  A first door opening switch detection mechanism for detecting the first door opening switch 111 according to the open / closed state of the front frame 3 and the front door frame 4 is provided on the right side of the upper mechanism plate fixing projection 364 on the opening side. Is provided.

  The first door opening switch detection mechanism includes a through hole 376 that penetrates the front frame 3 in the front-rear direction, a spring 380 that can be inserted in combination with the through hole 376, a switch rod member 375, and a cover member 381. . The switch rod member 375 is formed with a spring stopper for preventing the spring 380 from passing therethrough. A hole into which the switch rod member 375 can be inserted is formed in the center of the cover member 381.

  The first door opening switch detection mechanism is configured by inserting the spring 380 and the switch rod member 375 into the through hole 376 in this order. Then, the switch rod member 375 is protruded from the hole formed in the cover member 381 and fixed by the mounting screw 384. The switch bar member 375 protrudes to the front side when the mechanism plate 140 is fixed to the front frame 3 and the front door frame 4 is open with respect to the front frame 3. When the front door frame 4 is in the closed state, the rear door frame 4 is configured to protrude rearward. With this configuration, even when the mechanism plate 140 is fixed to the front frame 3, the first door opening switch 111 is not turned on when the front door frame 4 is in the open state. . Further, even when the front door frame 4 is closed with respect to the front frame 3, the first door opening switch 111 is not turned on when the mechanism plate 140 is not fixed to the front frame 3. . That is, the first door opening switch 111 is turned on only when the front door frame 4 is closed with respect to the front frame 3 and the mechanism plate 140 is fixed to the front frame 3. It is configured.

  A front frame ball passage 394 is formed on the right side of the out ball communication passage 359. The upper part of the front frame ball passage 394 communicates with the ball passage of the mechanism plate 140, and the lower part communicates with an out ball outlet 388 formed in the closing plate 386.

  The closing plate 386 is fixed by locking the locking piece 368 in the mounting hole 387. An out sphere outlet 388 is formed in the closing plate 386 corresponding to the portion where the out sphere guide rib is formed. Further, a passage cover portion 395 is formed on the right side of the closing plate 386 so as to protrude from a portion corresponding to the front frame ball passage 394, and communicates with an out bulb outlet 388 below the passage cover portion 395. It is formed to do.

  In the back surface structure of the front frame 3, as a configuration other than the above, a connecting rod 392 (see FIG. 2), a ball hitting device 130, and a relay board mounting box 383 are fixed or attached to the back surface of the lower plate corresponding plate portion 301. .

  Further, the connecting rod 392 has a prize ball receiving opening (not shown) facing the downstream end of the surplus ball passage 711 of the mechanism plate 140 and a back side of the discharge port 756 from which the ball guided to the guide box member 342 is discharged. A covering rod portion (not shown) is provided to be overlapped in the front-rear direction. The surplus prize balls that have flowed out to the surplus ball passage 711 and the overflow balls, foul balls, and ball removal balls received by the guide box member 342 are guided to the lower plate 27. The relay board mounting box 383 accommodates the plastic frame relay board 108 and is fastened by mounting screws 383a.

  Next, the upper plate opening / closing frame 11 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view from the front of the upper plate opening / closing frame 11. The upper plate opening / closing frame 11 is mainly composed of an upper plate decoration member 400 serving as a base of the upper plate opening / closing frame 11 and an upper plate 19 attached to the upper plate decoration member 400. The upper plate 19 is configured by attaching an upper plate cover body 409 made mainly of colored synthetic resin and an upper plate body 420 made of colored synthetic resin with mounting screws 413, and is attached to the upper plate decoration member 400. It is attached with a mounting screw 448.

  The upper plate body 420 has a storage portion so as to communicate the prize ball outlet 20 formed at the upper left portion of the upper plate decoration member 400 and the ball feed member opening 446 formed at the lower right portion of the upper plate decoration member 400. 482 and an alignment portion 481 are formed. Further, the upper plate cover body 409 is provided with a ball release lever opening 445 in the upper part on the open side, and the ball removal operation lever 21 is attached so as to face the ball release lever opening 445. . The ball removal operation lever 21 is attached to the lever base 464.

  The ball removal mechanism in the present embodiment mainly includes a ball removal operation lever 21, a lever base 464, a ball removal shutter 423 that freely closes a flow bottom surface of an alignment portion 481 described later, and a ball removal operation lever. The ball removal link 427 is configured to slide the ball removal shutter 423 to open when the button 21 is pressed, and a spring 466 that biases the ball removal operation lever 21 upward. The ball-shutter shutter 423 is attached to the lever base 464 so as to be sandwiched by the shutter cover 468. The shutter cover 468 is formed with a groove into which one end of the shutter portion of the ball removal shutter 423 enters. The ball removal shutter 423 is configured to be slidable left and right along a groove formed in the shutter cover 468. Further, an insertion hole 427 a into which the ball extraction shaft pin 469 is inserted is formed at one end of the ball extraction link 427. The ball removal link 427 is attached to the lever base 464 by the link cover 467 in a state where the ball removal link pin 469 inserted through the insertion hole 427a can rotate about the rotation shaft.

  In the ball removal mechanism, when the player presses the ball removal operation lever 21 against the urging force of the spring 466, the other end of the ball removal link 427 rotates counterclockwise around the ball removal shaft pin 469 as a rotation axis. In addition, the ball removal shutter 423 that contacts the ball removal link 427 slides to the left, and the bottom surface of the bottom of the alignment portion 481 is in an open state so that the ball is removed. On the other hand, when the player is not depressing the ball removal operation lever 21, the spring 466 rotates the other end of the ball removal link 427 in the right direction with the ball removal shaft pin 469 as the rotation axis, and the ball removal shutter 423 is moved to the right. It slides in the direction and is configured such that the bottom surface of the flow bottom of the alignment portion 481 is closed. The ball that has been removed from the ball is caused to flow down a ball passage (not shown) formed in the upper plate body 420 from the alignment portion 481, and is formed in the lower center of the upper plate decoration member 400. From 444 through the ball outlet 398, the discharge port 335 leads to the lower plate 27 through the connecting rod 392.

  A prize ball connecting rod 455 is attached to the back surface of the above-mentioned prize ball payout opening 20. The prize ball connection rod 455 is attached to an attachment boss (not shown) protruding from the left and right outer sides of the prize ball payout opening 20 with attachment screws 459 corresponding to the left and right attachment pieces 456.

  In addition, the ball feed member 470 having the swinging member 472 faces the ball feed member opening 446 described above. The ball feeding member 470 is attached by fitting a fitting mounting boss 471 integrally formed on the left and right sides thereof to a mounting boss 421 formed on the downstream end of the upper plate body 420, thereby opening the ball feeding member opening 446. Is attached to a mounting boss (not shown) projecting in the vicinity of the base plate by a stopper 473 that is swingably fixed by a mounting screw 475 so that the back surface is not pressed and dropped. Accordingly, the ball feeding member 470 receives the hitting balls supplied from the aligning portion 481 and responds to the operation of the swinging member 472 that swings in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the hitting ball 600 of the hitting ball launching device 130 described in detail later. Thus, the hit balls are supplied one by one to the launch position of the launch rail 345.

  Further, as described above, the left decorative unit 23b as a covering member is attached to the left side of the upper dish decorative member 400, and the right decorative unit 24b as a covering member is attached to the right side. And it is provided in the front side of the upper plate decoration member 400 so that the game effect lamp | ramp 16b and the game effect lamp | ramp 17b as a light-emitting member may face inside the left decoration unit 23b and the right decoration unit 24b, respectively.

  The left decoration unit 23b includes a left reflecting member 443a that reflects light from the game effect lamp 16b provided on the lamp substrate 192b to the front side, and a left light diffusion for diffusing light from the game effect lamp 16b to the front side. It comprises a member 440a, a left protective cover 438a that covers the left light diffusing member 440a, and an upper heat-resistant plate 439a that constitutes the upper part of the ashtray unit 29.

  First, the left reflecting member 443a will be described. The left reflecting member 443a is configured by a left game effect lamp region 432b in which a lamp concave portion facing the game effect lamp 16b is formed. The left game effect lamp region 432b is silver-plated over the entire surface on the front side in order to easily reflect light from the game effect lamp 16b to the front side. Further, the left game effect lamp region 432b is formed so that the entire surface on the front side has a complicated uneven shape. A lamp recess that is hemispherical is formed on the surface. A lamp hole 432c is provided in the center of the lamp recess so that the game effect lamp 16b faces the lamp hole 432c.

  Next, the left light diffusion member 440a and the left protective cover 438a will be described. The left light diffusing member 440a and the left protective cover 438a are formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin that can visually recognize the left reflecting member 443a and have a shape that covers the left game effect lamp region 432b. . Further, the surface of the left light diffusion member 440a is subjected to a light diffusion process for diffusing light from the game effect lamp 16b to the front side. An attachment boss used to attach the left protection cover 438a to the front side of the upper dish decoration member 400 is formed on the rear surface side of the left protection cover 438a. An attachment recess 438b for attaching the heat-resistant plate 439a is formed below the left protective cover 438a. Further, below the left light diffusion member 440a, a window 440b into which the mounting recess 438b of the left protective cover 438a enters is formed. A mounting boss 439b is formed on the rear surface side of the heat-resistant plate 439a. Further, an insertion hole through which the mounting boss 439b of the heat-resistant plate 439a is inserted is formed in the mounting recess 438b of the left protective cover 438a.

  Next, the attachment part of the upper dish decoration member 400 to which the left decoration unit 23b is attached will be described. A lamp hole 432c 'is formed at a position corresponding to the lamp hole 432c formed in the left reflecting member 443a in the attachment portion of the upper dish decoration member 400. Further, on the rear surface side of the upper dish decoration member 400 to which the left decoration unit 23b is attached, an insertion hole for inserting the attachment screw 431a and screwing it onto the attachment boss of the left protective cover 438a and the attachment boss 439b of the heat-resistant plate 439a. 431b is formed. An attachment boss for attaching the lamp substrate 192b with the attachment screw 431b is formed on the rear surface side of the attachment portion of the upper plate decoration member 400. The left reflecting member 443a is formed with an insertion hole similar to the insertion hole 431b of the attachment portion of the upper dish decoration member 400.

  The left decoration unit 23b has been described above. However, in the right decoration unit 24b, the member that covers the right game effect lamp region 441b formed by the right reflection member 441a is the left light diffusion member 440a described in the left decoration unit 23b. And the left protective cover 438a are formed of a member 441c integrally formed with each other, and are substantially symmetrical with each other, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  Further, an upper plate hinge 451 for attaching the upper plate decoration member 400 to the front frame 3 so as to be openable and closable with respect to the front frame 3 is attached to the rear surface of the upper plate decoration member 400 on the shaft support side by an attachment screw 454. The upper plate hinge 451 has an upper portion bent at a right angle toward the front surface side, and an insertion hole 452 is formed at the tip thereof. Further, an L-shaped hinge pin 453 is provided at the lower part. The shaft support pin 319 of the frame lower hinge 318 of the front frame 3 is inserted into the insertion hole 452, and the hinge pin 453 is also inserted into the insertion hole 323 of the lower dish frame hinge 322 of the front frame 3. The upper dish decoration member 400 is pivotally supported with respect to the front frame 3 around the pivot pin 319 and the hinge pin 453 so as to be freely opened and closed. A blindfold cover 498 is attached to the front side of the upper plate hinge 451.

  Further, an upper plate lock 460 for opening and closing the upper plate opening / closing frame 11 with respect to the front frame 3 is attached to the rear surface of the upper plate decoration member 400 on the opening / closing side by an attachment screw 463. The upper plate lock 460 includes an engagement piece 462 that is engaged with the upper plate lock plate 352 of the front frame 3 and an upper plate lock plate 352 that is pressed downward when opening and closing the upper plate opening / closing frame 11. An operation piece 461 that is unlocked from the piece 462 is provided.

  Next, the upper plate body 420 constituting the upper plate 19 will be described. The upper plate body 420 is formed by integrally forming a storage portion 482 for storing a prize ball and an alignment portion 481 that communicates with the storage portion 482 and aligns the prize balls in a line and guides them to a firing position. It is. A metal reinforcing plate (ground plate) 425 is attached to the bottom surface of the alignment portion 481 so that the bottom surface is not worn by the flowing-down sphere. The reinforcing plate 425 is connected to an upper plate hinge via a metal ball release cover 476 fixed to mounting bosses (not shown) provided on the back surface of the upper plate decoration member 400 with mounting screws 477 and 478. By connecting the upper plate hinge 451 to the reinforcing hinge member 176, the static electricity of the game balls aligned in the alignment portion 481 is discharged. That is, the reinforcing plate 425 also functions as a ground plate.

  Further, an engagement concave portion 483 is formed along the upper edge of the upper plate body 420, and an engagement convex portion 484 formed along the upper edge of the upper plate cover body 409 when the upper plate cover body 409 is assembled. It is designed to be fitted. Further, on the front side of the upper plate body 420, a ball extraction path (not shown) for guiding the extracted ball to the extraction ball rolling surface of the guide box member 342 described later is formed. Further, an attachment boss 411 for attaching the upper plate cover body 409 to the upper plate decoration member 400 protrudes from the back side of the upper plate cover body 409.

  Further, an attachment opening 416 for attaching the operation button 19a and a balance display substrate 104 are attached to the upper surface of the upper plate cover body 409 corresponding to the alignment portion 481 when the upper plate body 420 is assembled. A mounting opening 410 is opened.

  The operation buttons 19a are made of a transparent synthetic resin having translucency, a button 19b that is directly pressed by the player, a name sheet 19c on which a button name (for example, “CHANCE!” Etc.) is described, and a button 19b A button base 19d that can move up and down within a certain range, a compression spring 19e that urges the button 19b upward, a button case 19f that sandwiches the compression spring 19e and accommodates the button base 19d, and a button 19b And a detection switch 19g for detecting whether or not it has been operated. When the operation button 19a is operated, a detection signal is output from the detection switch 19g to the effect control board 90.

  A transparent lens plate 414 made of translucent translucent synthetic resin (smoke) is attached to the mounting opening 410. The fluoroscopic lens plate 414 has a peripheral flange 415 formed in a step shape around the periphery. The peripheral collar portion 415 comes into contact with the opening edge of the mounting opening 410 when the fluoroscopic lens plate 414 is mounted so as to be fitted into the mounting opening 410 from the inside of the upper plate cover body 409.

  By the way, the see-through lens plate 414 is configured such that the balance display substrate 104 is attached to the back side thereof. That is, a pair of substrate mounting bosses (not shown) are suspended from the rear surface of the fluoroscopic lens plate 414, and the balance display substrate 104 is fixed to the lower end of the substrate mounting boss by the mounting screws 104a. The balance display board 104 has a ball lending switch 36 (only the code is shown in FIG. 24), a return switch 37 (only the code is shown in FIG. 24), a frequency display LED 105 (only the code is shown in FIG. 24), and a ball lending. A display LED 106 (only the reference numeral is shown in FIG. 24) is mounted, and wiring is connected to the back surface thereof by a connector. These ball lending switch 36, return switch 37, frequency display LED 105, and ball lending display LED 106 are operations operated when borrowing a game ball via the card unit device 731 provided adjacent to the ball game machine 1. Part. The ball lending switch 36 is operated when borrowing a game ball by the card unit device 731 when the ball lending indication LED 106 is lit, and the return switch 37 is operated by the card unit device 731 at the end of the game. This is for returning the card inserted into the card insertion slot. The frequency display LED 105 displays the remaining amount of the card inserted into the card insertion slot of the card unit device 731.

  Further, the fluoroscopic lens plate 414 has an operation button mounting recess formed at a position corresponding to the ball lending switch 36 and the return switch 37, and further an operation button opening 417 is formed in the operation button mounting recess. The ball lending button 418a and the return button 418b are slidably attached to the opening 417 via springs 419a and 419b, respectively, and each switch 36, 37 is pressed. In addition, when the upper plate 19 of this structure is applied to a ball game machine in which the card unit device 731 is not adjacent, the balance display board 104 is not attached to the back side, and a spare button is provided in the operation button opening 417. An embedded fluoroscopic lens plate may be used, or a fluoroscopic lens plate without an opening 417 and a substrate mounting boss may be used. Further, a wear prevention member 437 (nylon sheet) is attached to a portion corresponding to the storage portion 482 with the upper plate 19 attached so that the front side of the front door frame 4 is not worn by the hitting ball. ing. A mounting recess 403 for mounting a name decorative plate 404 made of synthetic resin is formed in the approximate center of the front surface. The name decoration plate 404 displays a manufacturer's logo and is attached to the mounting recess 403.

  Next, the lower tray 27, the ashtray unit 29, and the operation handle 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view from the front of the lower tray 27, the ashtray unit 29, and the operation handle 30. Below the front frame 3, as described in FIG. 15, a lower plate corresponding plate portion 301 corresponding to the lower plate 27, the ashtray unit 29, and the operation handle 30 is configured. On the front side of the lower plate corresponding plate portion 301, a lower plate 27 that covers almost the entire region is attached.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the lower plate 27 includes a lower plate set plate 534, a lower plate body 519 attached to the front side of the lower plate set plate 534, and a left lower plate cover member that covers the left and right sides of the lower plate body 519. 528a and a right lower plate cover member 528b, and a lower plate cover body 490 that covers the front side and the lower surface of the lower plate body 519.

  The lower dish set plate 534 is formed of a colored resin material, and a prize ball outlet 541 is formed at substantially the center thereof, and a prize ball guide tube portion 547 projects rearward from the prize ball outlet 541. ing. As described above, the award ball guiding cylinder portion 547 is connected to the connecting rod 392 through the surplus sphere discharge port 338 formed at the substantially center of the lower plate corresponding plate portion 301. Positioning holes (not shown) for positioning by inserting positioning pins (not shown) of the connecting rods 392 are formed on both sides of the cylindrical portion 547. Also, insertion holes 548 are formed below and on both sides of the prize ball outlet 541, and an insertion piece 558 formed in the lower plate body 519 is inserted into the insertion hole 548, so that the lower plate body 519 is set in the lower plate. Positioning is performed with respect to the plate 534. Note that a mounting boss is formed at the tip of the insertion piece 558 of the lower plate main body 519, and the lower plate main body 519 is fixed to the lower plate by fastening the mounting screw 524 from the rear surface side of the lower plate setting plate 534. It is assembled to the set plate 534.

  Also, an insertion groove 548a is formed on the side of the insertion hole 548, and an insertion piece 558a formed in the lower left dish cover member 528a and the lower right dish cover member 528b is inserted into the insertion groove 548a, and the lower left dish cover member. 528 a and the lower right pan cover member 528 b are positioned with respect to the lower pan set plate 534. The mounting boss 543 is made to correspond to the mounting boss 496 of the lower plate cover body 490 and is fixed from the back surface with mounting screws 531 to assemble the lower plate set plate 534 and the lower plate cover body 490.

  The lower plate body 519 attached to the front of the lower plate set plate 534 is formed in a concave shape whose rear is opened so as to have a storage portion for storing a prize ball flowing out from the prize ball outlet 541. In addition, a circular sphere hole 519a is formed on the bottom surface of the storage part of the lower plate body 519, and the sphere hole 519a is closed by a ball valve 505 attached to the back surface of the lower plate body 519 so as to be opened and closed. Yes. Accordingly, on the back side of the bottom surface of the lower plate body 519, a ball release valve guide rib (for sliding the ball release valve 505 to slide on its upper surface so that the ball release valve 505 can easily move horizontally) is guided. (Not shown) and an attachment boss (not shown) for attaching a ball release valve storage box 508 for storing the ball release valve 505 are formed to project. The structure related to the ball removal valve 505 will be described next. Further, a contact collar 520 is provided on the front surface of the upper end of the lower plate main body 519 so as to project forward, and when the lower plate main body 519 is assembled, the lower plate cover body 490, which will be described later, below the contact mounting portion 515. It is designed to be inserted into.

  Next, the ball removal valve 505 attached to the back side of the bottom surface of the lower plate body 519 will be described. The ball removal valve 505 is slidably accommodated in a rectangular ball removal valve storage box 508. Specifically, the ball removal valve storage box 508 has openings 509 corresponding to the ball removal holes on one side thereof, and fitting holes 510 into which the mounting bosses 522 are fitted at the four corners. Yes. On the other hand, the ball release valve 505 is configured to slide while being in contact with the inner side of the longitudinal side wall of the ball release valve storage box 508, and is a spring engagement protrusion protruding from the other center of the ball release valve storage box 508. The ball removal valve 505 is always urged in a direction to close the ball removal hole by a spring 507 passed between 511 and a spring engaging portion (not shown) formed on the back surface of the ball removal valve 505. . Further, the ball release valve 505 is integrally formed with an engagement piece 506 that protrudes outside the ball release valve storage box 508.

  Thus, the ball removal valve storage box 508 in which the ball removal valve 505 is accommodated as described above is attached from the lower back surface of the lower plate body 519 so that the fitting hole 510 is fitted to the attachment boss, and then from the back surface side. By screwing the attachment screw 512, the ball removal valve 505 can be attached to the bottom side of the bottom plate body 519. In the attached state, the ball removal valve 505 is configured to close the ball removal hole by the biasing force of the spring 507, but by moving the engagement piece 506 against the biasing force of the spring 507. The prize ball stored in the storage part of the lower plate main body 519 can be extracted downward by opening the ball hole. The mechanism for moving the engagement piece 506 is assembled to a lower plate cover body 490 described below.

  As described above, the lower plate body 519 to which the ball removal valve 505 is mounted is assembled to the lower plate cover body 490. The lower plate cover body 490 is formed of a flat (colored, for example, white) synthetic resin material so that the front center portion protrudes in a bulging shape and both sides correspond to the lower plate corresponding plate portion 301. ing. The front center portion is curved downward. In addition, a lever opening / closing port 492 to which the ball removal operation lever 28 is attached is formed at the tip of the protruding portion. A rectangular opening 555 through which the ball removal valve storage box 508 passes is formed below the bulging portion. Further, an ashtray attachment portion 495 to which the ashtray unit 29 is attached is formed on the left side of the lower plate cover body 490. A handle fixing hole 493 to which the operation handle 30 is attached is formed on the right side of the lower plate cover body 490.

  Next, the mounting structure of the ball removal operation lever 28 will be described. The ball removal operation lever 28 includes a finger hooking portion 500 operated by a player and a lever base 501 that is a base of the operation lever 28. The finger hook portion 500 is formed so that the left half protrudes as an operation portion so that the player can easily move the finger hook portion 500 to the left, and the right side surface of the operation portion is formed in a substantially flat shape. In addition, an insertion piece 556 that is inserted into an insertion hole 557 (described later) of the lever base 501 protrudes from the back side of the finger hook portion 500. Further, the lever base 501 is formed in an arc shape along the front surface portion of the lower plate cover body 490, and an insertion hole 557 into which the insertion piece 556 of the finger hook portion 500 is inserted is formed in the center of the front surface. . On the back side of the insertion hole 557, the insertion piece 556 of the finger hook portion 500 is engaged with the engagement piece 506 of the ball removal valve 505. The insertion piece 556 of the finger hook portion 500 is inserted into the lever opening / closing port 492 from the front side of the lower plate cover body 490, and the insertion hole 557 of the lever base 501 is fitted to the insertion piece 556 from the back side of the lower plate cover body 490. Combine. In this state, the finger hooking portion 500 and the lever base 501 are fixed by the mounting screws 504, whereby the ball removal operation lever 28 is assembled and attached to the lower plate cover body 490 at the same time.

  In the state where the ball removal operation lever 28 is previously attached to the bulging portion of the lower plate cover body 490 as described above, the ball removal valve storage box 508 is inserted into the opening 555 through the lower plate body 519 obliquely from above. Assemble. In this assembled state, the engagement piece 506 of the ball removal valve 505 is positioned on the left side of the engagement piece 502 of the ball removal operation lever 28 as shown in FIG. 28, the engagement piece 502 and the engagement piece 506 are engaged with each other to slide the ball removal valve 505 against the urging force of the spring 507. To open the hole. On the other hand, when the finger is released from the finger hooking portion 500, the ball removal valve 505 closes the ball removal hole by the biasing force of the spring 507 and moves the ball removal operation lever 28 to the right.

  Then, after assembling the lower plate body 519 to the lower plate cover body 490, the lower plate set plate 534 is applied from the rear, the mounting bosses 543 and 496 are aligned, and the mounting screws 531 are attached from the rear of the lower plate set plate 534. The lower plate 27 is assembled by screwing onto the boss 496.

  Incidentally, the ashtray unit 29 and the operation handle 30 are assembled to both sides of the lower plate cover body 490. First, the mounting structure of the ashtray unit 29 will be described. On the left side when viewed from the front of the lower tray cover body 490, as described above, the concave ashtray mounting portion 495 for assembling the lower tray 27 is formed. Yes. On the other hand, the ashtray unit 29 includes an ashtray main body 29a, a cover member 29b that covers the outer periphery of the ashtray main body 29a, an ashtray shaft member 29c that serves as a rotating shaft when the direction of the ashtray main body 29a is changed from the upper side to the lower side, The ashtray shaft member 29c is composed of a shaft support cover 29d for supporting the ashtray shaft member 29c on the rear surface side of the lower plate cover body 490. The cover member 29b is formed with a recess into which the ashtray main body 29a enters. The ashtray main body 29a is fixed by a mounting screw 29e from below in a state where the ashtray main body 29a enters the recess of the cover member 29b. At this time, one end of the ashtray shaft member 29c is sandwiched between the ashtray main body 29a and the cover member 29b. The other end of the ashtray shaft member 29c is pivotally supported by the pivot cover 29d. Thereby, the direction of the ashtray main body 29a can be changed from the upper side to the lower side by rotating the ashtray shaft member 29c toward the front side. Note that a lower heat-resistant plate 439c is fixed to the front side of the lower tray cover body 490 to which the ashtray unit 29 is attached from the rear side of the lower tray cover body 490 by mounting screws 439d.

  On the other hand, a handle fixing hole 493 for attaching the operation handle 30 is formed on the right side when viewed from the front of the lower plate cover body 490. The handle fixing hole 493 is a bottomed hole in which a through-hole through which only a rotating shaft 571 and a switch wiring 591 described later pass is formed. The operation handle 30 is fixed to the handle fixing hole 493 by matching with the mounting hole 559 formed in the end wall thickness of the rear gripping member 584 that is in contact with and fixing with the mounting screw 497. However, the operation handle 30 is fixed by engaging a positioning recess 588 protruding from the end surface of the rear gripping member 584 with a positioning protrusion 588a formed on the bottom surface.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the operation handle 30 attached to the handle fixing hole 493 includes a rear gripping member 584 fixed to the handle fixing hole 493 and a mounting boss 589 on the front side of the rear gripping member 584. The attachment screw 577 is attached to the outer periphery of the touch ring 110 and the touch ring 110 is provided on the outer periphery of the touch ring peripheral member 576, and the connection screw boss 585 is provided in front of the rear gripping member 584. A front gripping member 560 fixed at 569, a rotation operation member 570 that is sandwiched between the touch ring circumferential member 576 and the front gripping member 560 and is rotatably provided, and the rotation operation member 570. And a spring 567 for applying power. The rotation operation member 570 is engaged with the front end of the rotating shaft 571, and the engaged state is a so-called D-shaped cut surface 572 in which only one surface of the rotating shaft 571 is cut out. In contrast, the rear end of the rotating shaft 571 protrudes outside from the rear end of the rear gripping member 584 and passes through the handle shaft through hole 341 opened in the lower plate corresponding plate portion 301 of the front frame 3. At both ends, there are both-side cut surfaces 573 in which both end surfaces of the rotating shaft 571 are cut out, and these both-side cut surfaces 573 are engaged with a main driving roller 632 of the ball striking device 130 described later. The rotary shaft 571 is supported at its middle by a bearing member 575 that is fitted into the inner rear end of the rear gripping member 584. The mounting position of the bearing member 575 is restricted by a retaining ring 574 attached to the rotating shaft 571. Further, the wiring connected to the single firing switch 109 and the touch wiring (not shown) connected to the touch ring 110 constitute a switch wiring 591, and this switch wiring 591 is a lower plate corresponding plate portion of the front frame 3. A wiring through hole 340 opened at 301 is connected to the launch control board 107 provided in the hitting ball launching device 130. In the touch ring 110, a connection terminal 579 to which a touch wiring is connected is fixed to a mounting boss 590 with a mounting screw 580.

  In the operation handle 30 configured as described above, the rotation operation of the rotation operation member 570 causes the rotation operation of the rotation shaft 571 to rotate the main driving roller 632 of the hitting ball launcher 130 to adjust the resilience. To do. Further, when the player is operating the rotation operation member 570, the player's finger contacts the touch ring 110, so that the contact signal is also derived. The touch signal is turned on by the contact signal, the single shot switch 109 is turned off and a ball is shot, and the firing strength is adjusted by the amount of rotation. The single firing switch 109 can be turned on and off by pressing the swing member 581 (stop button). Further, the single firing switch 109 and the swing member 581 described above are attached to attachment bosses 587 and 586 protruding from the rear gripping member 584 with attachment screws 583 and 582, respectively.

  Next, a ball striking device 130 that is driven when the operation handle 30 is operated will be described with reference to FIG. 19A is a perspective view of the hit ball launching device 130, FIG. 19B is an exploded perspective view from the front of the hit ball launching device 130, and FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view from the back.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the hitting ball launching device 130 has a U-shape for attaching a hitting ball 600 that hits and fires a pachinko ball and a stepping motor (launching motor) 601 that is a driving source of the hitting ball 600. A mounting base 601a formed in a shape, a lifting rod 602 that swings the swinging member of the ball feeding member each time the pachinko ball is fired, and sequentially sends the pachinko ball to the ball striking device 130, and a pachinko ball by the ball ball 600 A launch intensity adjusting unit 603 that adjusts the hitting force of the operation handle, and an operation transmitting unit 604 that transmits the rotational operation force of the operation handle 30 to the launch intensity adjusting unit 603 are attached to a metal mounting board 606. ing. The mounting base 601a is attached with the above-described launch motor 601 and the launch control unit 605 that controls the drive of the launch motor 601 (consisting of the launch control board 107 and the board box 640 that accommodates this). Is configured.

  In the peripheral portion of the mounting substrate 606, screw holes 607 for mounting the ball striking device 130 to the back side of the front frame 3 with mounting screws are formed at four locations. The mounting substrate 606 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting various components, and is formed with cylindrical projections (not shown) for mounting various members constituting the firing strength adjusting portion 603. . The inside of the cylindrical protrusion is formed as a communication hole that communicates one side of the mounting substrate 606 with both sides of the other side, and a drive shaft 609 passing through the communication hole is rotatably supported by a bearing. An attachment boss 606a for attaching the attachment base 601a is provided upright on the rear surface side of the attachment substrate 606.

  The hitting ball 600 has an arm shape, and at one end thereof, a hook for hitting a pachinko ball is formed by a spring 611. The hitting ball 600 is fixed by a nut 608 through a washer 651 with one end of the drive shaft 609 inserted in the shaft hole 600a, so that the hit ball 槌 600 can be rotated about the drive shaft 609 as a rotation center. It is attached to the attachment substrate 606. In addition, when hitting the hitting ball 600, the hit arm 612 having a rotatable arm roller 612a attached to the tip is fixed to the drive shaft 609 together with the hitting ball 600, and the hit arm 612 is integrated with the hitting ball 600. Therefore, the drive shaft 609 is rotated about the rotation center. Note that the rotation of the hitting ball 600 is regulated by the hook receiving rubbers 613a and 613b. The bearing rubber 613a is fixed to the mounting substrate 606 with a bolt 615a and a nut 653a via a rubber holder 614a. Further, the hook rubber 613b is fixed to the mounting substrate 606 with a bolt 615b and a nut 653b via a rubber holder 614b.

  The firing motor 601 is attached to the mounting base 601a with the output shaft passing through the mounting base 601a by fixing the mounting piece 616 to the mounting base 601a. A driving cam (not shown) for transmitting the driving force of the firing motor 601 to the hitting ball 600 through the hit arm 612 (arm roller 612a) is integrally attached to the output shaft.

  The other end of the lifting rod 602 is rotatably mounted by screwing one end with a mounting screw 623 through a washer 619 to a mounting hole provided at the upper center of the mounting substrate 606. An end portion of the rotatable lifting rod 602 is placed on the upper surface of a projection 603a of a holding cap 627 described later. Then, the end of the rotatable lifting rod 602 is pushed up by a projection 603a of a holding cap 627, which will be described later, when the hitting ball 600 rotates clockwise in FIG. 19A, and the ball feeding member swings. Actuate the member. Thereby, the ball can be fed from the upper plate 19 onto the firing rail 345. Note that the state where the end of the rotatable lifting rod 602 is raised to the uppermost position is a standby state of the ball being hit by the hitting ball 600. That is, the ball is supplied onto the firing rail 345 by the end of the rotatable lifting rod 602 once rising and then descending, and the ball striking rod 600 is rotated in the direction opposite to the firing direction from the firing direction. , The ball on the launch rail 345 is fired and driven into the game area of the game board 40 along the guide rail 42.

  The firing strength adjusting portion 603 includes a rotating ring 625 having a gear portion 625a formed on a part of the outer periphery, a coil-shaped strength adjusting spring 626 that adjusts the firing strength of the hit ball according to the amount of twist, and a holding cap 627 having a protrusion 627a. , Ratchet cover 628, ratchet arm (not shown), and the like. The rotating ring 625 has a plurality of strength adjustment grooves 639 that are engaged with the ends of the strength adjustment springs 626. Depending on which strength adjustment groove 639 is used as the end of the strength adjustment spring 626 The return force of the ball changes, thereby adjusting the firing strength of the hit ball. The end of the gear portion 625a of the rotating ring 625 is brought into contact with a restricting protrusion 630 that protrudes from the mounting substrate 606, whereby the rotation of the rotating ring 625 is restricted. The holding cap 627 and the ratchet cover 628 are integrally assembled by a one-way screw 631 and are rotated integrally with the rotation of the drive shaft 609. That is, when the hitting ball 600 is rotated in the clockwise direction in FIG. 19A, the drive shaft 609 is also rotated in the clockwise direction. As a result, the end of the rotatable lifting rod 602 placed on the upper surface of the protrusion 603 a of the holding cap 627 is pushed up by the protrusion 603 a of the holding cap 627. The one-way screw 631 is a special screw that rotates only in the screw tightening direction, and cannot be removed once tightened.

  Further, an end cap (not shown) is fitted and attached to the ratchet cover 628, and the inner space of the firing strength adjusting portion 603 (the operation groove of the ratchet arm (groove for adjusting the firing strength) is attached by the end cap. Is accommodated in a sealed state. For this reason, unless the end cap or the ratchet cover 628 is destroyed and the end cap is removed from the ratchet cover 628, the internal space of the firing strength adjusting portion 603 cannot be opened. That is, in order to adjust the launch intensity, the operation groove cannot be rotated. The end cap is made of an opaque black synthetic resin. When the end cap is attached to the ratchet cover 628, the internal space of the firing intensity adjusting unit 603 is not visible from the outside. That is, the operation groove cannot be visually recognized. For this reason, since it becomes impossible to know that the operation unit (operation groove) of the launch intensity adjusting unit 603 is covered, it is difficult to perform the cheating when attempting to operate the operation unit of the launch intensity adjusting unit 603 illegally. Can do.

  The operation transmission unit 604 includes a rotation ring 635, a spring 634, and the like in which a gear unit 635a is formed on a part of the outer periphery. The rotating ring 635 has a groove 633 in which the end of the spring 634 is locked. The rotation ring 635 is attached to the attachment substrate 606 so that the gear portion 635a meshes with the gear portion 625a of the firing strength adjusting portion 603 by fixing the attachment screw 658. One end of the spring 634 is locked to the groove 633 of the rotation ring 635, and the other end is locked to a spring locking member 657 erected on the mounting substrate 606. Further, the rotation ring 635 is integrally attached to the rotation shaft of the operation handle 30. Accordingly, if the operation handle 30 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the rotation ring 625 via the rotation ring 635, and the rotation ring 625 can be rotated and displaced. Then, the rotation ring 625 that is rotationally displaced in this way adjusts the amount of twist of the strength adjustment spring 626 by the rotation.

  The launch control unit 605 includes a launch control board 107 on which various electronic components (which may or may not be equipped with a CPU) and a plurality of connectors (not shown) are mounted, and a board that houses the launch control board 107 Box 640. The plurality of connectors are connected to wiring from the plastic frame relay board 108, wiring from the firing motor 601, wiring from the single firing switch 109, switch wiring from the touch ring 110 of the operation handle 30, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 19, the board box 640 that houses the above-described launch control board 107 includes a box main body 641 that is fixed to the mounting board 606 with a mounting screw 638, and a box main body 641 that is attached to the box main body 641. And a cover body 642 for sandwiching the firing control board 107 therebetween. The box main body 641 and the cover body 642 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the firing control board 107 to be accommodated can be visually recognized from the outside. Leg portions 643 are provided upright at the upper right side and the lower left and right sides of the box main body 641, respectively, and the box main body 641 is fixed to the mounting base 601 a at the front end portion of the leg portion 643 by the mounting screws 638. A mounting hole 644 is formed. Note that mounting holes are formed on the mounting base 601a side at positions corresponding to these mounting holes 644, respectively. Each leg 643 has a cylindrical shape, and a mounting screw 638 is inserted into the cylinder to fix the mounting screw 638 to the mounting substrate 606 from the box main body 641 side. For this reason, even when the mounting surface portion is configured by the mounting base 601a of the ball striking device 130 as in this embodiment, the board box 640 can be removed without removing the mounting base 601a from the ball game machine 1. Can do.

  The box main body 641 (substrate box 640) is attached and fixed to one side surface of the mounting base 601a to which the firing motor 601 is attached via a leg portion 643. Therefore, the launch control board 107 accommodated in the board box 640 is mounted in a state (floating state) at a predetermined interval (height of the leg portion 643) from the board surface (mounting surface) of the mounting base 601a. Will be. Therefore, the fluidity of the air around the firing motor 601 can be improved, the heat generated by the firing motor 601 can be reduced, and the firing control board 107 can be made less susceptible to the adverse effects of noise and heat from the firing motor 601. Further, according to such an attachment structure, it is not necessary to provide a mounting space as large as the launch control board 107 in the mount base 601a as it is, so that space can be saved in the layout design of the launch control board 107. . Note that the mounting surface portion to which the board box 640 is attached is not limited to the mounting base and the mounting board of the hitting ball launching device, but may be the back surface portion of the ball game machine that is not related to the hitting ball launching device. In addition, the heat radiation sheet 601c is affixed to the top plate of the firing motor 601 in the present embodiment, and the firing motor heat radiation cover 601b is further attached thereon. Therefore, the heat generated by driving the firing motor 601 can be efficiently radiated.

  Although the configuration of the hit ball launching device 130 has been described above, the hitting ball launching operation by the hit ball launching device 130 is performed as follows. That is, when the player operates the operation handle 30, the firing motor 601 is driven accordingly, and the drive cam rotates. Next, the hit arm 612 and the hitting ball 600 are rotated by the rotation of the drive cam, and the strength adjusting spring 626 of the firing strength adjusting unit 603 is further twisted. Thereafter, when the drive cam further rotates and the drive cam is detached from the hit arm 612 (arm roller 612a), the hit arm 612 and the hitting ball 600 are rotated counterclockwise together with the drive shaft 609 by the restoring force of the strength adjusting spring 626. To do. Then, the hitting ball basket 600 rotated counterclockwise hits the ball fed from the swinging member of the ball feeding member by the operation of the lifting rod 602 with the hook part (spring 611) and is launched into the game area. At this time, if the rotation ring 625 of the firing strength adjusting unit 603 is rotated by operating the operation handle 30, the amount of twist of the strength adjusting spring 626 accompanying the backward driving (rotation in the clockwise direction) of the hitting ball rod 600 Can be adjusted. That is, the striking force (firing force) of the hitting ball 600 can be adjusted.

  FIG. 21 shows a reinforcing hinge member 176 attached to the mechanism plate 140, a hitting ball launching device 130 attached to the front frame 3, a locking device 128, a plastic frame reinforcing bracket 371 a, a plastic frame hinge bracket 314, and a game board 40. It is a connection diagram of the attached conductive plate 40a, guide rails 42a and 42b, rail connection member 327a, obstacle nail 37a and the like.

  First, the hitting ball launching device 130 is electrically connected to the metal locking device 128 via a metal mounting substrate 606 and a stainless steel plate launching device contact member 373. The locking device 128 is electrically connected to a guide rail 42b made of a stainless steel plate via a rail connection member 327b made of a stainless steel plate.

  The guide rail 42b is electrically connected to a conductive member such as the obstacle nail 37a and the decorative member 66 provided in the guide rail 42a of the stainless steel plate and the game area 41 via a conductive plate 40a formed of a conductive synthetic resin. Connected. The guide rail 42a is electrically connected to the plastic frame reinforcing bracket 371a via a rail connection member 327a of a stainless steel plate.

  The plastic frame reinforcing metal fitting 371a is electrically connected to the plastic frame hinge metal fitting 314 through a reinforcing metal fitting connecting member 314a made of a stainless steel plate. The plastic frame hinge metal fitting 314 is connected to the reinforcing hinge member 176 and is grounded by engaging a latching hole 177a (see FIG. 5) with the shaft pin 315.

  Accordingly, the reinforcing hinge member 176 attached to the mechanism plate 140, the hitting ball launching device 130 attached to the front frame 3, the locking device 128, the plastic frame reinforcing bracket 371a, the plastic frame hinge fitting 314, and the gaming board 40 are attached. The electric potentials of the conductive plate 40a, the guide rails 42a and 42b, the obstacle nail 37a, etc. are all the same and are at the ground level.

  In addition, although the structure of the back surface of the front door frame 4 and the upper plate opening / closing frame 11 was described above, the upper hinge metal fitting 45 of the front door frame 4 is connected to the lower hinge metal fitting via the metal frame base 4a of the front door frame 4. 46 is electrically connected. In the state where the front door frame 4 is closed with respect to the front frame 3, the upper hinge fitting 45 of the front door frame 4 is further made of the metal of the frame base 4 a of the front door frame 4 and the upper plate opening / closing frame 11. It is electrically connected to the firing rail 345 and the reinforcing plate 425 via a ball removal cover 476. The upper hinge bracket 45 of the front door frame 4 is electrically connected to the plastic frame reinforcing bracket 371a via a metal frame base upper hinge 311. That is, the upper hinge fitting 45 of the front door frame 4 is connected to the reinforcing hinge member 176 and grounded. As a result, the potentials of the upper hinge fitting 45, the lower hinge fitting 46, the ball removal cover 476 for the upper plate opening / closing frame 11, the firing rail 345, the reinforcing plate 425, and the like are all the same, and the grounding is performed. Can be level.

  FIG. 22 is a perspective view showing the structure of the driving device for the hammer 951 provided on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 44b. The hammer 951 is driven by a motor 950 serving as a drive source. The rotational force of the motor 950 is transmitted to a gear 952 fitted to the rotation shaft of the motor 950, and further transmitted to a gear 953 that meshes with the gear 952. A flat plate 956 provided with a notch 956a is fitted to the rotary shaft 957 with which the gear 953 is fitted. Further, the arm 958 of the hammer 951 is fitted to the end of the rotation shaft 957 in a direction orthogonal to the axial direction of the rotation shaft 957 so that the hammer 951 rotates in the same direction as the rotation direction of the gear 953. The member 959 is used for fitting.

  When the gear 952 is rotated in the direction of the arrow shown in FIG. 22A by the rotational force of the motor 950, the flat plate 956 and the hammer 951 are moved according to the rotation of the rotating shaft 957 with which the gear 953 to which the rotational force is transmitted is fitted. Rotate. Then, the hammer 951 is moved from the position shown in FIG. 22 (A) to the position shown in FIG. 22 (B). The notch 956a formed in the flat plate 956 is detected by the sensor 954 when the hammer 951 is at the position shown in FIG. 22A, and the sensor 955 when the hammer 951 is at the position shown in FIG. Perceived by.

  That is, the sensors 954 and 955 are an example of position detecting means for detecting the position of the hammer 951 and outputting the detection result as a detection signal. The sensors 954 and 955 are installed at positions where both ends of the rotatable range of the hammer 951 can be detected. The rotatable range of the hammer 951 is, for example, 90 degrees.

  The configuration of the ball game machine 1 has been described above. Next, a circuit configuration connected by wiring will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a block diagram showing the relationship between the main board 120, various control boards, and electrical components.

  On the main board 120, a game control microcomputer 99 for controlling the ball game machine 1 according to a program is mounted. A game control microcomputer 99 (also referred to as game control means) includes a ROM 100 for storing a game control program, a RAM 111 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 112 for controlling a game signal in accordance with the program, and an effect. An I / O port unit 114 that transmits a control signal (command) to the control board 90 and the like is included. In this embodiment, the ROM 100 and the RAM 111 are built in the CPU 112. That is, the CPU 112 is a one-chip microcomputer. In addition, the CPU 112 used in this embodiment includes a non-maskable interrupt terminal (NMI terminal) used for generating a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) that cannot be set to interrupt prohibition by software, And an interrupt terminal (INT terminal) used to generate an external interrupt (external interrupt; maskable interrupt that can be disabled by software). However, this embodiment does not use non-maskable interrupts and external interrupts. Therefore, the NMI terminal and the INT terminal are pulled up to VCC (+5 V) through resistors. Therefore, the input level of the NMI terminal and the INT terminal is always high, and the input level of the NMI terminal and the INT terminal falls from the high level to the low level due to noise, etc., compared to the case of the terminal open state, and an interrupt is generated. The possibility of entering a state is reduced. Since CPU 112 executes control according to a program stored in ROM 100, what CPU 112 executes (or performs processing) hereinafter means that CPU 112 executes control according to the program. It is. The same applies to CPUs mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 120. The game control microcomputer 99 used in this embodiment is a peripheral circuit such as the CPU 112, the ROM 100, the RAM 111, and the I / O port unit 114 mounted on the main board 120.

  The RAM 111 is a backup RAM as a storage unit that is partially or wholly backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 111 are stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). At least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control microcomputer 99 (for example, special symbol process flag, prize ball addition value, etc.) is stored in the backup RAM. Note that the data corresponding to the control state of the game control microcomputer 99 is necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. It is data. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 111 is backed up.

  The main board 120 includes a clear signal indicating that the clear switch 921 for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated from the power supply board 910, and a power-off indicating that the power supply voltage has decreased to a predetermined value or less. A signal and a reset signal used as a game control permission signal (a signal for making the CPU operable) are input to the game control microcomputer 99.

  Signals from the switches 51, 52, 55a, 55b, 56a, 56b, 62 provided on the game board 40 are input to the main board 120 via the switch relay board 95, and the full switch 158 and the ball break switch A signal from 157 is input via the payout control board 98. It should be noted that the signal from the ball break switch 157 may be configured not to be input to the main board 120. Similarly, the signal from the full tank switch 158 may be configured not to be input to the main board 120. Further, a signal from a payout number count switch (not shown) mounted on the ball payout device 154 is input to the main board 120 via the payout control board 98.

  A signal from the start port switch 60 is also input to the main board 120. Further, the main board 120 is configured with a random counter for determining a big hit for generating a random value used to randomly determine in advance whether or not to generate a big hit for the variable display of the special symbol display device 44a. A random number generation circuit 60a is connected. When the signal from the start port switch 60 is input, the random number generation circuit 60a inputs the count value at that time to the main board 120. The main board 120 latches the count value input from the random number generation circuit 60a in the storage buffer provided in the RAM 111, and reads the latched count value when it is determined that the start winning is actually made. Perform processing.

  Based on the input signals from the switches 51, 52, 55a, 55b, 56a, 56b, 62 provided on the game board 40 among the input signals described above, the main board 120 is connected to the solenoids 50, 59 provided on the game board 40. , 65 are controlled, and an electric decoration signal and a sound effect signal corresponding to the gaming state are output to the voice frame lamp board 92 via the peripheral command relay board 57 and the effect control board 90, and further, the decorative symbol display device 44b. An effect control command for controlling the display state is output to the symbol relay board 84 and the effect control board 90, and various game information is output to the board external terminal board 96. The effect control board 90 drives and controls the variable display operation of the decorative symbol display device 44b in accordance with the type of information signal from the main board 120, and further exchanges information signals with the audio frame lamp board 92. Is. The peripheral command relay board 57 relays an information signal to be output to the effect control board 90.

  The voice frame lamp board 92 controls the lighting of the game effect lamps 13a to 13c, 16a, 16b, 17a, and 17b attached to the front door frame 4 according to the type of the illumination signal input from the main board 120. Do. The voice frame lamp board 92 controls the speakers 12 a and 12 b according to the type of the sound effect signal input from the main board 120. Further, the voice frame lamp board 92 controls the lighting of the decoration lamps 32a and 32b attached to the game board 40 via the lamp driver board 93 in accordance with the type of the decoration signal input from the main board 120. Do. The voice frame lamp board 92 performs lighting control of various game effect lamps according to the gaming state (a variation pattern, a normal gaming state or a probability variation state, or a gaming state such as a variation display), Drive control of game sound from the speaker is performed. The lamp driver board 93 relays the connection with the voice frame lamp board 92 for controlling the lighting state of the decorative lamp provided on the game board 40.

  The main board 120 inputs a display control signal (drive signal) via the symbol relay board 84 to the special symbol and special symbol memory board 85 on which the special symbol display device 44a and the special symbol start memory LED 67 are mounted. While performing display control of the special symbol in the display device 44a, lighting control of the special symbol start memory LED 67 is performed. Thereby, a control board for a special symbol display device equipped with a driver circuit and a microcomputer is provided between the main substrate 120 and the special symbol display device 44a, and based on a display control signal (drive signal) from the main substrate 120. Compared with the case where the display control of the special symbol display device 44a is performed by the control board or the like, the result of the big hit determination can be surely displayed.

  The main board 120 inputs a display control signal (driving signal) to the normal symbol board 86 on which the normal symbol display device 63 is mounted via the symbol relay board 84, and displays the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 63. Take control. Further, the main board 120 inputs a display control signal (drive signal) via the symbol relay board 84 to the normal symbol memory board 87 on which the normal symbol start memory LED 68 is mounted, and controls the lighting of the normal symbol start memory LED 68. Do.

  The effect control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 118 (including a peripheral circuit such as a CPU (not shown), a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown), an I / O port unit (not shown), and the like. An example of a microcomputer for controlling electrical components (see FIG. 25, also referred to as effect control means) is mounted, and the decorative symbol display device 44b can display the decorative symbol in accordance with the type of the effect control command input from the main board 120. Perform display control.

  The effect control microcomputer 118 operates in accordance with a program stored in the ROM, and when receiving an effect control command from the main board 120, performs display control of the decorative symbol display device 44b according to the received command according to the received effect control command. Do. Specifically, the display control of the variable display unit is performed by a VDP 119 (see FIG. 25) having a display control function for displaying an image and a high-speed drawing function. The effect control microcomputer 118 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM is for storing character image data frequently used among images displayed on the decorative symbol display device 44b, specifically, a person, a monster, a character, a figure, a symbol, or the like in advance. .

  Then, the production control microcomputer 118 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 119. The VDP 119 operates based on data input from the effect control microcomputer 118. In this embodiment, a VDP 119 that performs display control of the decorative symbol display device 44 b is mounted on the effect control board 90. Each VDP 119 has a two-dimensional address space independent of the production control microcomputer 118 and maps to that space.

  The VDP 119 generates image data to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 44b according to the received command in accordance with the character image data, and the VDP 119 is expanded in the VRAM. A RAM is a frame buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP 119.

  The effect control board 90 further includes an operation button 19a, a motor 950 for operating a hammer 951 as a movable member provided on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 44b, and an operating position of the hammer 951. Sensors 954 and 955 are connected. The effect control microcomputer 118 reads data stored in the ROM mounted on the effect control microcomputer 118 based on the signal input from the operation button 19a, and controls the motor 950 in accordance with the read data. Drive control. Thereby, the hammer 951 can be operated by operating the operation button 19a. Further, the effect control microcomputer 118 can determine the position of the hammer 951 and drive-control the motor 950. For example, when the detection signal from the sensor 954 is input, the effect control microcomputer 118 determines that the hammer 951 is at the position shown in FIG. 5A, and the detection signal from the sensor 955 is input. The hammer 951 is determined to be at the position shown in FIG. 5B, and control for reversing the motor 950 and control for stopping the motor 950 are performed.

  Further, the production control microcomputer 118 inputs an information signal corresponding to the voice frame lamp board 92 based on the data read based on the signal input from the operation button 19a. Then, the voice frame lamp board 92 drives and controls a decoration lamp, a game effect lamp, a speaker and the like based on the input information signal.

  Next, the dispensing control board 98 outputs a dispensing stop signal to the ball dispensing device 154 based on the full tank signal from the full tank switch 158, and stops the driving of the dispensing motor 115. The full tank signal from the full tank switch 158 is input to the main board 120 via the payout control board 98. When a full tank signal from the full tank switch 158 is input to the main board 120, a full tank signal is output from the main board 120 to the audio frame lamp board 92 to display and drive a predetermined lamp or LED. May be notified. Further, since the full tank signal from the full switch 158 is output to the payout control board 98, for example, an error indicator on the payout control board 98 or the like may be notified.

  Further, based on the input signals from the switches 51, 52, 55a, 55b, 60, 56a, 56b except the gate switch 62 provided on the game board 40, the main board 120 sends a prize ball control signal to the payout control board 98. Output. The payout control board 98 adds the number of prize balls based on the prize ball control signal to the number of unpaid, and drives the ball payout device 154 to pay out the number of prize balls. Further, based on the input signal from the payout number count switch 116, the payout control board 98 subtracts the payout number from the unpaid number. Further, the payout control board 98 displays the prize ball LED 10 based on the prize ball control signal and notifies the fact.

  Further, the payout control board 98 outputs a payout stop signal to the ball payout device 154 based on the ball cut switch signal from the ball cut switch 157 to stop the driving of the payout motor 115. At that time, the payout control board 98 drives the bulb-cut LED 9 in a predetermined manner.

  When either the full tank switch 158 or the ball break switch 157 is turned on, a payout stop signal (payout stop command) is output from the payout control board 98 so that the payout of the prize ball or the like is not performed. If both switches 158 and 157 are OFF, a payout enable signal (payout stop release command) may be output. Further, when there is an unpaid in place of the prize ball LED 10, an unpaid notification lamp or the like that lights up may be provided.

  Only the switch input for controlling the game operation and the switch input for controlling the payout operation of the prize ball are input to the main board 120, and the relationship between the main board 120 and other control boards excluding the payout control board 98 In FIG. 2, the communication relationship is one-way from the main board 120 to another control board. For this reason, there is an advantage that an illegal processing program is incorporated into another control board and cannot be executed even if an illegal process is performed on the main board 120, and a part of the control of the main board 120 is transferred to another control board. Since the control board is in charge, the burden on the main board 120 can be reduced and the inspection of the main board 120 can be facilitated.

  Further, the payout control board 98 includes signals from the payout sensor board 114, the payout motor 115, and the payout number count switch 116 mounted on the ball payout device 154, and the full tank signal from the full tank switch 158 as described above. Or, a ball break signal from the ball break switch 157 is input. Further, the payout control board 98 is connected to an interface board 103 that relays signals from the card unit device 731 and the balance display board 104, and a ball rental switch 36 and a return switch 37 mounted on the balance display board 104. And various information from the card unit device 731 are input. Further, as described above, a prize ball control signal is input from the main board 120 to the payout control board 98. Of the above-described input signals, the payout control board 98 is based on the input signal from the payout sensor board 114 and the stop position of the payout motor 115 in the lending and winning ball payout operation, that is, the ball payout member of the ball payout device 154. It is possible to accurately control the stop position and detect whether or not the ball dispensing member is operating. Further, based on an input signal from the payout number count switch 116, the payout control board 98 drives and controls the payout motor 115 so as to pay out the correct payout number of the rented and winning balls, and the frame external terminal plate 102. Information on the number of balls rented (25 pulses for 100 yen is 1 pulse). Note that lending is performed by transmitting and receiving various signals between the payout control board 98 and the card unit device 731 via the interface board 103 and driving the ball payout device 154. Various signals transmitted and received between the payout control board 98 and the card unit device 731 will be described later with reference to FIG. Furthermore, the payout control board 98 executes the payout operation of the prize ball based on a prize ball control signal from the main board 120, a ball dead signal and a full tank signal directly inputted from the switch, and the firing control board 107. Or a stop signal of the firing motor 601 is output. Note that the input signals from the ball break switch 157 and the full tank switch 158 connected to the frame external terminal board are output to the external hall management computer or the like as ball break information or full tank information.

  FIG. 24 is a block diagram showing components related to payout, such as the payout control board 98 and the ball payout device 154. As shown in FIG. 24, on the payout control board 98, a payout control microcomputer 660 including an payout control CPU 659 (an example of an electric component control microcomputer, also referred to as payout control means) is mounted. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 660 is a one-chip microcomputer and has a built-in RAM for storing at least the number of payouts. The payout control microcomputer 660, the RAM (not shown), the ROM (not shown) storing the payout control program, the I / O port, and the like constitute the payout control means. That is, the payout control means is realized by a payout control microcomputer 660, a payout control microcomputer 660 having a RAM and a ROM, and an I / O port. The I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 660. At least a part of the RAM in the payout control microcomputer 660 is backed up by a backup power source mounted on the power supply board 910. In this embodiment, it is assumed that all RAM areas are backed up. Therefore, even when power is not supplied to the gaming machine, the storage contents of the RAM are preserved for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged).

  Detection signals from the ball break switch 157 and the full tank switch 158 are input to the I / O port 661d of the payout control board 98 via the sunpack relay board 101. Further, the sunpack relay board 101 is connected to the frame external terminal board 102 by a connector. The external terminal board for frame 102 includes a connector for outputting the number of prize balls as a connector for connecting a signal line between the outside (for example, a management computer) and the ball game machine 1, and first and second Connectors for outputting signals from the door opening switches 111 and 112 are provided as external connection terminals.

  The detection signals from the payout number count switch 116 and the payout sensor board 114 mounted on the ball payout device 154 are input to the I / O port 661c of the payout control board 98 via the payout relay board 113. The payout control microcomputer 660 performs a process of subtracting the unpaid number stored in the RAM based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 116. The payout control microcomputer 660 outputs a signal for driving the payout motor 115 via the payout relay board 113 when there is an unpaid number. Further, the payout control microcomputer 660 outputs a payout stop signal from the I / O port 661c to the payout relay board 113 when a signal indicating that the ball is full or full is input to the I / O port 661b. The payout relay board 113 stops the drive of the payout motor 115 when receiving the payout stop signal.

  Detection signals from the single firing switch 109 and the touch ring 110 mounted on the operation handle 30 are input to the firing control board 107. The firing control board 107 outputs a signal for driving the firing motor 601 based on the detection signals from the single firing switch 109 and the touch ring 110. The payout control microcomputer 660 outputs a ball break signal to the plastic frame relay board 108 via the I / O port 661b when a signal indicating ball break is input to the I / O port 661d. The plastic frame relay board 108 performs control to turn on the ball break LED 9 based on the ball break signal. Further, the payout control microcomputer 660 outputs a prize ball signal to the plastic frame relay board 108 via the I / O port 661b based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 116. The plastic frame relay board 108 performs control to turn on the prize ball LED 10 based on the prize ball signal. The payout control microcomputer 660 outputs a firing stop signal to the plastic frame relay board 108 via the I / O port 661b when a signal indicating that the ball is full or full is input to the I / O port 661d. You may make it do. In this case, the plastic frame relay board 108 may output a firing motor disabling signal to the firing control board 107 so that the firing motor 601 cannot be driven.

  Further, when a game ball is won at the winning opening, a prize ball control signal indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out is output from the output circuit 662 of the main board 120 (turns on). Further, when the game control microcomputer 99 is started up (when the operation is started), a payout start command (a payout start command) is output. Then, a prize ball REQ signal (prize ball request signal) for instructing to take in a prize ball control signal or a payout activation command is output (turned on).

  In this embodiment, the winning ball control signal and the payout activation command are transmitted through the same signal line. The winning ball control signal and the payout activation command are composed of 5-bit data (binary 5-digit data) and are output through five signal lines. Note that the ON state of the signal, that is, the output state is a state in which the signal is significant, and turning on means that the signal receiving side is instructed to start some processing based on the signal. To do. For example, when the prize ball control signal indicating the number of prize balls and the prize ball REQ signal are turned on, this means that the dispense control means is instructed to recognize the number of prizes indicated by the prize ball control signal. To do.

  The prize ball control signal and the payout activation command are input to the I / O port 661g via the input circuit 663A. The prize ball REQ signal is input to a maskable interrupt terminal (hereinafter also simply referred to as an interrupt terminal) of the payout control CPU 659. The payout control CPU 659 receives an award ball control signal via the I / O port 661g in an interrupt process based on the award ball REQ signal input to the interrupt terminal, and the number of the award ball control signals indicates. In order to pay out the game ball, the ball paying device 154 is controlled to be driven. A connection confirmation signal indicating that the main board 120 is connected is also output from the output circuit 662 of the main board 120.

  When the payout control microcomputer 660 accepts a payout command signal, it sends a command acceptance signal to the main board 120. The command acceptance signal is transmitted to the main board 120 via the output port 662h of the payout control board 98 and the output circuit 663B. Then, in the main board 120, the data is input to the game control microcomputer 99 via the input circuit 666 and the I / O port 114. In this embodiment, the command acceptance signal is transmitted when the prize ball BUSY signal is turned on.

  The payout control board 98 also includes a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped below a predetermined value from the power supply board 910, a clear signal indicating that the clear switch for clearing the contents of the RAM has been operated, A reset signal used as a payout control permission signal (a signal for making the CPU operable) for the payout control microcomputer 660 is input to the input port 661a.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 660 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 664 using a 7-segment LED via the output port 661f. A detection signal from the error release switch 665 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 661e of the payout control board 98. The error cancel switch 665 is used for canceling the error state by software reset.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit device 731 installed adjacent to the ball game machine 1. In addition, the card unit device 731 is provided with a usable display lamp, a connecting table direction indicator, a card insertion display lamp, and a card insertion slot. A frequency display LED 105, a ball lending display LED 106, a ball lending switch 36 and a return switch 37 provided in the vicinity of the upper plate 19 are connected to the interface board 103.

  A card lending switch signal indicating that the ball lending switch 36 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 37 has been operated are given from the interface board 103 to the card unit device 731 according to the player's operation. It is done. Further, the card unit device 731 receives a card balance display signal indicating a prepaid card balance and a ball lending display signal from the card unit device 731. Between the card unit device 731 and the payout control board 98, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal) and a pachinko machine operation signal (PRDY signal) is transmitted / received via the input port 661i and the output port 661j. An interface board 103 is interposed between the card unit device 731 and the payout control board 98. Therefore, signals such as a connection signal (VL signal) are transmitted and received between the card unit device 731 and the payout control board 98 via the interface board 103 as shown in FIG.

  When the power of the ball game machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 660 mounted on the payout control board 98 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit device 731. The card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal when the power is turned on. The payout control microcomputer 660 determines whether the card unit device 731 is connected or not based on the input state of the VL signal. When a card is received by the card unit device 731, the ball lending switch is operated and a ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 98. When a predetermined delay time elapses from this point, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 98.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 660 raises the EXS signal to the card unit device 731 and, when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit device 731, drives the payout motor 115 to play a predetermined number of rental balls. Pay to the person. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 660 causes the EXS signal to the card unit device 731 to fall. Thereafter, when a BRDY signal from the card unit device 731 is not in an ON state, a prize ball payout control is executed when a payout command signal is received from the game control means.

  The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit device 731 is supplied from the payout control board 98. That is, power supply from the power supply board 910 to the card unit device 731 is performed via the payout control board 98 and the interface board 103. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit device 731 is provided in the AC 24V power supply line for the card unit device 731 arranged in the interface board 103, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is applied to the card unit device 731. It is prevented from being supplied.

  The payout control CPU 659 used in this embodiment generates a non-maskable interrupt terminal (NMI terminal) used for generating a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) and a maskable interrupt. And an interrupt terminal (INT terminal) used for the purpose. However, this embodiment does not use non-maskable interrupts and external interrupts. Therefore, the NMI terminal and the INT terminal are pulled up to VCC (+5 V) through resistors. The maskable interrupt is an interrupt that can be controlled so that no interrupt is generated by software. An interrupt based on a signal input to the interrupt terminal is also referred to as an external interrupt.

  FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the effect control board 90 and the voice frame lamp board 92. In the effect control board 90, the effect control CPU 118a in the effect control microcomputer 118 operates in accordance with a program stored in a ROM (not shown) and is transmitted from the main board 120 via the peripheral command relay board 57. An effect control command is received via the peripheral command relay board 57, the input driver 667, and the input port 668 in response to the embedded signal (effect control INT signal). Further, the effect control microcomputer 118 causes the VDP (video display processor) 119 to perform display control of the decorative symbol display device 44b using the LCD based on the effect control command. The VDP 119 is sometimes called a GCL (graphic controller LSI).

  The peripheral command relay board 57 allows signals (effect control signal and effect control INT signal constituting the effect control command) input from the main board 120 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 90 (effect control board). A unidirectional circuit 57a is mounted as a signal input blocking means. As the unidirectional circuit 57a, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 25 illustrates a diode. Further, the unidirectional circuit 57 a is provided for each signal line passing through the peripheral command relay board 57. A signal from the effect control board 90, a signal input to the effect control board 90 (an operation signal corresponding to the operation of the operation button 19a and a detection signal of the sensors 954, 955), and a voice frame lamp connected to the effect control board 90 A signal from the board 92 (a board not connected to the main board 120 is also referred to as a peripheral board) is not transmitted to the game control microcomputer 99 of the main board 120 due to the presence of the peripheral command relay board 57. Therefore, the signal input path from the outside to the game control microcomputer 99 is limited, and the possibility of an illegal act of sending an illegal signal to the game control microcomputer 99 can be reduced. Furthermore, when the peripheral command relay board 57 is attached in such a manner that the back surface of the peripheral command relay board 57 is visible, the back surface of the peripheral command relay board 57 can be easily viewed. It is possible to easily find out that an illegal act of illegally inputting a signal to the microcomputer 99 has been performed.

  In this embodiment, the example in which the unidirectional circuit 57a is provided on the peripheral command relay board 57 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the unidirectional circuit 57a may be provided on the main board 120. Further, the effect control board 90 may be provided. That is, the unidirectional circuit 57a may be configured to be provided in a place where an illegal signal can be prevented from being input to the game control microcomputer 99.

  An operation signal from the operation button 19 a operated by the player and detection signals from the sensors 954 and 955 are input to the effect control microcomputer 118 via the input port 669. In addition, the production control microcomputer 118 gives a drive signal to the motor 950 that drives the hammer 951 via the output port 670.

  Furthermore, the production control microcomputer 118 controls the voice frame lamp board 92 via the input / output port 671 and controls the voices emitted from the speakers 12a and 12b and the game effect lamps 13a to 13c. , 16a, 16b, 17a, 17b, and lamp control commands for controlling the lighting state of the decorative lamps 32a, 32b.

  In the voice frame lamp board 92, the voice frame lamp control microcomputer 92a including the CPU, ROM and RAM is connected to the speaker 12a via the voice driver circuit 673 based on the control data stored in the ROM corresponding to the voice control command. , 12b. The voice frame lamp control microcomputer 92a is connected to the game effect lamps 13a to 13c, 16a, 16b, 17a, and the like via the frame lamp driver circuit 672 based on the control data stored in the ROM corresponding to the lamp control command. 17b is controlled. Further, the voice frame lamp control microcomputer 92a outputs a drive signal for controlling the decoration lamps 32a and 32b via the bus driver 674 based on the control data stored in the ROM corresponding to the lamp control command. Output to the driver board 93.

  In the lamp driver board 93, the decoration lamps 32 a and 32 b are controlled via the output port 676 and the decoration lamp driver circuit 677 based on the drive signal output from the audio frame lamp board 92 input from the bus driver 675. The lamp driver board 93 is further provided with an expansion port 678 so that other effect devices can be driven.

  The lamp control command and the voice control command in the present embodiment are two-way communication (a response signal is transmitted from the command receiving side to the transmitting side) between the effect control microcomputer 118 and the voice frame lamp control microcomputer 92a. Communication). This will be described later with reference to FIG.

  As will be described later with reference to FIG. 26, the reset signal from the power supply monitoring circuit 920 is input to the voice frame lamp control microcomputer 92 a mounted on the voice frame lamp board 92. The reset signal from the power supply monitoring circuit 920 is input to the effect control microcomputer 118 via the audio frame lamp board 92 and further via the input / output port 671 mounted on the effect control board 90.

  Next, the configuration of the power supply substrate 910 will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. The power supply board 910 is provided with a power switch 914 for executing or shutting off power supply to each electrical component control board and mechanism component in the gaming machine. Note that the power switch 914 may be provided outside the power supply board 910 in the gaming machine. When the power switch 914 is in a closed state (on state), AC power (AC 24 V) is applied to the input side (primary side) of the transformer 911. The transformer 911 is for electrically insulating the AC power supply (AC24V) and the inside of the power supply substrate 910, and its output voltage is also AC24V. A varistor 918 as an overvoltage protection circuit is installed on the input side of the transformer 911.

  The power supply board 910 is installed independently of the electrical component control board (the main board 120, the payout control board 98, the effect control board 90, etc.), and generates a voltage used by each board and the mechanical parts in the gaming machine. In this example, AC24V, VSL (DC + 30V), VLP (DC + 24V), VDD (DC + 12V) and VCC (DC + 5V) are generated. Further, a capacitor 916 serving as a storage holding means for holding the stored contents in the backup power supply (VBB), that is, the backup RAM, is charged from DC + 5V (VCC), that is, a power supply line for driving an IC or the like on each substrate. Further, a backflow prevention diode 917 is inserted between the +5 V line and the backup +5 V (VBB) line. Note that VSL is generated by rectifying and boosting AC 24 V with a rectifying element in the rectifying and smoothing circuit 915. VSL is a solenoid driving power source. VLP is a lamp lighting voltage, and is generated by rectifying AC24V with a rectifier element in the rectifier circuit 912.

  The DC-DC converter 913 serving as a power supply voltage generation unit has one or a plurality of regulator ICs (two regulator ICs 924A and 924B are shown in FIG. 26), and generates VDD and VCC based on VSL. Relatively large capacitors 923A and 923B are connected to the input sides of the regulator ICs (switching regulators) 924A and 924B. Accordingly, when the power supply to the gaming machine from the outside is stopped, the DC voltages such as VSL, VDD, VCC, etc., decrease relatively slowly.

  As shown in FIG. 26, the AC 24V output from the transformer 911 is supplied to the connector 922B as it is. The VLP is supplied to the connector 922C. VCC, VDD and VSL are supplied to connectors 922A, 922B and 922C.

  The cable connected to the connector 922A is connected to the main board 120. The cable connected to the connector 922B is connected to the payout control board 98. Therefore, VBB is also supplied to the connectors 922A and 922B. For example, a cable connected to the connector 922C is connected to the audio frame lamp board 92. Each voltage is supplied to the effect control board 90 and the lamp driver board 93 via the audio frame lamp board 92.

  In addition, a clear switch 921 having a push button structure is mounted on the power supply board 910. When the clear switch 921 is pressed, a low level (ON state) clear signal is output and transmitted to the main board 120 and the payout control board 98 via the connector 922A and the connector 922B. If the clear switch 921 is not pressed, a high level (off state) signal is output. The clear switch 921 may have a configuration other than the push button structure. Further, the clear switch 921 may be provided other than the power supply board 910 in the gaming machine.

  Further, the power supply board 910 generates a reset signal for the microcomputer mounted on the electric component control board, amplifies the reset signal from the power supply monitor circuit 920 that outputs a power-off signal, and the power supply monitor circuit 920. And an output driver circuit 925 that amplifies the power-off signal and outputs it to the connectors 922A and 922B. In the present embodiment, a reset signal via the audio frame lamp board 92 is input to the effect control microcomputer 118. However, the input pattern of the reset signal to the production control microcomputer 118 is not limited to this. For example, an input pattern in which a reset signal via the main board 120 or the payout control board 98 is input may be used.

  The power monitoring circuit 920 is a circuit that realizes a voltage drop monitoring unit that outputs a power-off signal and a reset signal generation unit that generates a reset signal. Note that the voltage drop monitoring unit and the reset signal generating unit may be configured by separate circuits. A commercially available power failure monitoring reset module IC can be used as the power monitoring circuit 920. The power supply monitoring circuit 920 outputs a power-off signal when a period during which a predetermined voltage (for example, + 24V) used in the gaming machine becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined value (for example, + 5V) continues for a predetermined time (for example, 56 ms). . Specifically, the power-off signal is turned on (low level). The power supply monitoring circuit 920 sets the reset signal to a low level when, for example, VCC becomes +4.5 V or less.

  The power supply monitoring circuit 920 is not limited to determining whether or not the voltage has become a predetermined value or less by determining whether or not the period in which the voltage has become a predetermined value or less has continued for a predetermined time or more. For example, it may be determined whether or not the voltage has become equal to or lower than a predetermined value by detecting a pulse obtained using a general full-wave rectifier circuit including a diode circuit. For example, among pulses obtained by full-wave rectification of an AC wave by a full-wave rectifier circuit, a pulse whose amplitude is greater than or equal to a predetermined value is counted, and when the voltage is not counted for a predetermined period, the voltage is less than or equal to a predetermined value. You may judge that it became.

  When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the power supply monitoring circuit 920 sets the reset signal to a low level on condition that a predetermined period has elapsed since the power-off signal was output (set to a low level). The predetermined period is a time sufficient for the game control microcomputer 99 mounted on the main board 120 and the payout control microcomputer 660 mounted on the payout control board 98 to execute power-off processing described later. is there. That is, after the power supply monitoring circuit 920 outputs a power-off signal as a voltage drop signal, the game control microcomputer 99 and the payout control microcomputer 660 complete the execution of power-off processing, and then the operation stop signal (reset Signal low level). In addition, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the VCC exceeds +4.5 V, for example, the reset signal is set to the high level. In this case, after the power-off signal is not output (after the high level is set) ) The reset signal is set to high level on condition that a predetermined period has elapsed. Therefore, when the microcomputer mounted on each electrical component control board (including the main board 120) starts control according to the program in response to the reset signal becoming high level, the power-off signal is always in the off state. It has become.

  The power-off signal from the power monitoring circuit 920 is input to the payout control microcomputer 660 via the input port 661a on the payout control board 98 (see FIG. 24). That is, the payout control microcomputer 660 can confirm the occurrence of the stop of the power supply to the gaming machine by monitoring the input signal of the input port 661a. In the main board 120, a power-off signal from the power monitoring circuit 920 is input to the game control microcomputer 99 via the input / output port 114 (see FIG. 23). That is, the gaming control microcomputer 99 can confirm the occurrence of the stop of the power supply to the gaming machine by monitoring the input signal of the input / output port 114.

  On the other hand, the reset signal from the power supply monitoring circuit 920 is input to the reset terminal of the payout control microcomputer 660 (see FIG. 24). Accordingly, the payout control microcomputer 660 can confirm the timing for setting the payout control operation execution state and the payout control operation stop state by monitoring the input state of the reset terminal. The reset signal from the power monitoring circuit 920 is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 99 (see FIG. 23). Therefore, the game control microcomputer 99 can confirm the timing for setting the execution state of the game control operation and the timing for stopping the game control operation by monitoring the input state of the reset terminal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply monitoring circuit 920 monitors the output of a power supply having a predetermined potential, and detects a voltage from the outside of the gaming machine (this is a detection condition for stopping the supply of power supplied to the gaming machine from the outside). In the embodiment, it is used that the predetermined DC voltage created from AC 24 V) is equal to or lower than the predetermined value. However, the detection condition is not limited to this, and it is possible to detect that the power from the outside is interrupted. Other conditions may be used. For example, the AC wave itself can be monitored to detect that the AC wave has been interrupted, or the AC wave can be detected by monitoring the digitized AC signal and the digital signal has become flat. May be used as a detection condition.

  Next, the operation of the game control means (game control microcomputer 99 and I / O port) will be described. 27 and 28 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of output port assignment in the game control means. As shown in FIG. 27, the output port 0 is an output port for prize ball control signals (CD0 to CD4) transmitted to the payout control board 98. Further, 8-bit data (CD0 to CD7) of the effect control command transmitted to the effect control board 90 is output from the output port 1. Note that the logic (for example, 0 is on) opposite to the “logic” (for example, 1 is on) shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 28 may be used. When the signal line between the control board 98 and the payout control board 98 is disconnected or when the cable is disconnected (including no cable connection), the payout control microcomputer 660 always detects “OFF”. Is defined. Specifically, generally, when a disconnection or disconnection of the cable occurs, a high level is detected on the signal receiving side, so the high level on the signal line between the main board 120 and the payout control board 98 is the game control means. The “logic” is determined to be in the off state at the output port at. Therefore, if necessary, an output buffer circuit for logically inverting the signal is provided outside the output port on the main board 120.

  Also, a solenoid (large winning port door solenoid) 65 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 48 for opening and closing the big winning port from the output port 2 and a solenoid for preventing the specific ball detector 51 from passing ( A drive signal is output to a solenoid (ordinary electric accessory solenoid) 59 for opening and closing the V-shutter solenoid 50 and the normal variable winning ball device 58. Furthermore, an effect control INT signal (capture signal) for the effect control command transmitted to the effect control board 90 is also output. The effect control INT signal is a signal for instructing the effect control means to capture (receive) 8-bit data of the effect control command.

  Then, various information output signals from the output ports 3 and 4 to the panel external terminal board 96 and the terminal board 160, that is, output data of information related to control are output.

  FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit allocation of input ports in the game control means. As shown in FIG. 29, the specific ball detector 51, the count switch 52, the gate switch 62, the winning ball detectors 55a, 55b, 56a, 56b, and the start port switch 60 are respectively set in bits 0 to 7 of the input port 0. The detection signal is input. Bits 0 to 3 of the input port 1 include a power-off signal from the power supply board 910, a clear signal from the power supply board 910, a clear signal from the clear switch 921, a prize ball BUSY signal from the payout control board 98, and a power supply board 910, respectively. The reset signal from is input. Furthermore, a gaming machine error status signal indicating that an error has occurred in the gaming machine is input from the payout control microcomputer 660 to bit 4 of the input port 1.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. 30 and 31 show main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 99 in response to the start of power supply to the game machine and the reset signal to the game control microcomputer 99 becoming high level. It is a flowchart. When the input level of the reset signal from the power supply board 910 becomes a high level (off state), the game control microcomputer 99 performs a part of the initial setting process which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid. After executing, the main processing after step S1 is started. In the main process, the game control microcomputer 99 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the game control microcomputer 99 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3).

Next, a software delay process for delaying the start timing of a payout activation command transmission process (step S5) described later by software is executed. Specifically, first, the initialization wait number specification value 1 is set in the wait counter 1 (step S81). Also, the initialization wait number specification value 2 is set in the wait counter 2 (step S82). Note that general-purpose registers (HL register and BC register) built in the game control microcomputer 99 are used as the wait counters 1 and 2. Then, the value of the wait counter 2 is decremented by 1 until the value of the wait counter 2 becomes 0 (steps S83 and S84). When the value of the weight counter 2 becomes 0, the value of the weight counter 1 is decremented by 1 (step S85). When the value of the weight counter 1 is not 0 (step S86), the process returns to step S82. If the value of the wait counter 1 is 0, the software delay process is terminated.

  By the software delay process as described above, the software delay process is not executed substantially by [(initialization wait number specification value 1) × (initialization wait number specification value 2) × (processing time of steps S83 and S84)]. Compared to the case, the start timing of the payout activation command transmission process (step S5) can be delayed. In other words, the initialization wait times designation values 1 and 2 are determined so that the start timing of the payout activation command transmission process (step S5) can be delayed by a desired time. Note that the values of the initialization wait times designation values 1 and 2 are set in the ROM 100. The software delay processing described here is an example, and the software delay processing may be realized by other methods.

  The game control microcomputer 99 used in this embodiment also incorporates an I / O port (PIO) and a timer / counter circuit (CTC) as a built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit). Two external clock / timer trigger inputs CLK / TRG 2 and 3 and two timer outputs ZC / TO 0 and 1 are provided.

  When the software delay processing is completed, the built-in device registers are initialized (settings such as input / output assignment of the built-in devices) and the built-in devices CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) are initialized. Perform (step S4). The initialization of PIO is, for example, setting an off state value to all bits of the output port. The initialization of the CTC is a timer mode setting or the like.

  In the game control microcomputer 99 used in this embodiment, the following three types of modes are prepared as maskable interrupt modes. When a maskable interrupt occurs, the game control microcomputer 99 automatically sets the interrupt disabled state and saves the contents of the program counter in the stack.

  Interrupt mode 0: The built-in device that made the interrupt request sends an RST instruction (1 byte) or a CALL instruction (3 bytes) onto the internal data bus of the game control microcomputer 99. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 99 executes an instruction at an address corresponding to the RST instruction or an address specified by the CALL instruction. At the time of resetting, the game control microcomputer 99 automatically enters the interrupt mode 0. Therefore, when setting to interrupt mode 1 or interrupt mode 2, it is necessary to perform a process for setting to interrupt mode 1 or interrupt mode 2 in the initial setting process.

  Interrupt mode 1: When an interrupt is accepted, the mode always jumps to address 0038 (h).

  Interrupt mode 2: The address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) of the microcomputer 99 for game control and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is It is a mode that indicates a cover address. That is, the interrupt address is an address indicated by 2 bytes in which the upper address is the value of the specific register and the lower address is the interrupt vector. Therefore, an interrupt process can be set at an arbitrary address (although it is skipped). Each built-in device has a function of transmitting an interrupt vector when making an interrupt request.

  Therefore, when the interrupt mode 2 is set, it becomes possible to easily process an interrupt request from each built-in device, and it is possible to install an interrupt process at an arbitrary position in the program. . Furthermore, unlike interrupt mode 1, it is also easy to prepare each interrupt process for each interrupt generation factor. As described above, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 99 is set to the interrupt mode 2 in step S2 of the initial setting process.

  Next, the game control microcomputer 99 executes a payout start command transmission process for transmitting a payout start command (payout start command) to the payout control board 98 (step S5), and then sets the RAM 111 to an accessible state (step S5). S6).

  The game control microcomputer 99 confirms the output state of the clear signal from the clear switch 921 input via the input port 1 only once (step S7). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the game control microcomputer 99 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15). When the clear signal from the clear switch 921 is in an on state (when pressed), a low level clear switch signal is output. In the input port 1, the clear switch signal is on at a high level. Further, for example, the game store clerk can easily execute the initialization process by starting power supply to the gaming machine while pressing the clear switch 921 (for example, turning on the power switch 914). That is, RAM clear or the like can be performed.

  If the clear signal from the clear switch 921 is not in the on state, data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. It is confirmed whether or not (step S8). In this embodiment, when power supply is stopped, processing for protecting data in the backup RAM area is performed. When it is confirmed that such protection processing has been performed, the game control microcomputer 99 determines that there is a backup. When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the game control microcomputer 99 executes initialization processing.

  Whether or not the protection process has been performed depends on the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process described later according to the execution of the data protection process in the backup RAM area (for example, It is confirmed by whether or not 2). Note that such a confirmation method is an example. For example, a flag indicating that data protection processing has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop processing, and the flag is set in step S8. If it is confirmed that there is a backup, it may be determined that there is a backup.

  If it is determined that there is backup, the game control microcomputer 99 performs data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S9). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checksum is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above processing is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the game control microcomputer 99 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area, and uses the inverted data as the checksum.

  In the power supply stop process, a checksum is calculated by the same process as described above, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S9, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power outage or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process (the processes of steps S10 to S15) executed when the power is turned on, not when the power supply is stopped. Execute.

  If the check result is normal, the game control microcomputer 99 returns the game state restoration process for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the display control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. To do. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 100 is set as a pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 111) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for areas that may be initialized among the work areas is set. As a result of the processing in steps S91 and S92, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating a gaming state before the power supply is stopped (such as a special symbol process flag), an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer), and unpaid prize balls This is the part where data indicating the number is set.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 99 sets the head address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 100 as a pointer (step S93), and indicates that the power supply has been restored to the effect control board 90 according to the contents. Control is performed so that the recovery command shown is transmitted (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

  In the initialization process, the game control microcomputer 99 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). Note that the entire area of the RAM 111 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a big hit determination random number) may be left as it is. For example, if the count value data of the counter for generating the big hit determination random number is left as it is, the big hit determination random number is generated even if the initialization process is executed by an unauthorized means. Therefore, it is difficult to aim at the timing at which the count value of the counter matches the jackpot determination value. Further, the initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 100 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol determination random number counter, a normal symbol determination buffer, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, an award ball flag, a ball out flag, and a payout stop An initial value is set to a flag such as a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state. In addition, a bit corresponding to the output port that outputs the connection confirmation signal in the output port buffer is set (corresponding to the ON state of the connection confirmation signal). Further, the game control microcomputer 99 sets the start address of the initialization command transmission table stored in the ROM 100 as a pointer (step S13).

  In step S15, the game control microcomputer 99 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 99 so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). . That is, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the game control microcomputer 99 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the game control microcomputer 99 disables the interrupt (step S16) and executes the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process. When is finished, the interrupt is permitted (step S19). The display random number is a random number for determining a symbol displayed on the special symbol display device 44a and the normal symbol display device 63. The display random number update process is a counter for generating a display random number. This is a process for updating the count value. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining an initial value of a count value such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to make a big hit (a big hit determination random number generation counter). In the random number update process in step S23, which will be described later, the value of the big hit determination random number generation counter is incremented by one, but the value of the big hit determination random number generation counter is one round (the minimum value that the big hit determination random number generation counter can take) When the value is incremented by the number of values between the value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  Note that when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt disabled state is set even when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are performed by the timer interrupt process described later. This is to avoid conflict with the processing in the timer interrupt processing. That is, if a timer interrupt is generated during the processing of steps S17 and S18 and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number and the initial value random number is updated during the timer interrupt processing, The continuity of values may be impaired. However, such an inconvenience does not occur if the interrupt disabled state is set during the processes of steps S17 and S18.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the payout activation command transmission process in step S5. In the payout activation command transmission process, the game control microcomputer 99 sets [1,0,0,0,0] (the position of “1” is bit 4) to the lower 5 bits of the output port 0 (see FIG. 27). Output (step S51). That is, a payout activation command is output to the output port 0 as a 5-bit prize ball control signal. Next, bit 6 of the output port 0 is set to “0” (step S52). That is, the prize ball REQ signal is turned on. Then, a delay process for setting the ON time of the prize ball REQ signal is performed by software (step S53). In this delay process, for example, a value corresponding to the delay time is set in a general-purpose register (HL register or BC register), and the process of decrementing the register value by −1 is repeatedly executed, so that the register value becomes zero. Then, the process ends. The delay time is set to a time sufficient for the payout control CPU 659 to recognize that the prize ball REQ signal has been input to the interrupt terminal.

  Then, bit 6 of the output port 0 is set to “1” (step S54). That is, the prize ball REQ signal is turned off. Thereafter, the lower 5 bits of the output port 0 are set to [0, 0, 0, 0, 0] (step S55). That is, all 0 is output as the prize ball control signal.

  FIG. 33 is a timing diagram showing how the microcomputer operates when power supply to the gaming machine is started and when power supply is stopped. When power supply to the gaming machine is started and the voltage of the DC + 24V power supply exceeds a predetermined value, the power-off signal is turned off. When the value of VCC exceeds a predetermined value, the reset signal becomes high level. As described above, the power supply monitoring circuit 920 sets the reset signal to high level after turning off the power-off signal. The reset signal is input to the main board 120, the payout control board 98, and the voice frame lamp board 92. The reset signal is input to the effect control board 90 via the voice frame lamp board 92. The CPU 112 mounted on the main board 120, the payout control CPU 659 mounted on the payout control board 98, and the effect control CPU 118 a mounted on the effect control board 90 are input to reset terminals.

  When the reset signal input to the main board 120 is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 99 (when the input level of the reset terminal becomes high), the game control microcomputer 99 is operable (the microcomputer is reset). The game control microcomputer 99 first executes part of the initial setting process (steps S1 to S3). When a part of the initial setting process is completed, a software delay process (steps S81 to S86) is performed. After that, a payout activation command transmission process (step S5) is executed, and then a clear signal output state check process (step S7) from the clear switch 921 is performed as a part of the initial setting process. After performing steps S10 to S13) or recovery processing (steps S91 to S94), gaming device control processing (steps S15 to S35) is started. If the clear signal from the clear switch 921 indicates an on state, RAM clear processing or the like is performed.

  The payout control CPU 659 becomes operable when the reset signal becomes high level. When the operation is enabled, a part of the initial setting process (steps S701 to S705 and S720 in FIG. 52) is first executed. Thereafter, it waits for a payout activation command to be transmitted from the main board 120 (step S721, etc.), and if a payout activation command can be received, the clear signal output state check process from the clear switch 921 is performed (step S708). Then, after performing the initialization process (step S712) or the recovery process (step S711), the payout device control process (steps S716 to S760) for controlling the firing motor 601, the payout motor 115, and the like is started. If the clear signal from the clear switch 921 indicates an on state, RAM clear processing or the like is performed.

  The game control microcomputer 99 transmits a payout activation command immediately before the check process of the output signal state of the clear switch 921, and the payout control CPU 659 confirms the state of the output signal of the clear switch 921 after confirming the payout start command. Perform the check process. At the time when the game control microcomputer 99 starts the payout start command transmission process by executing a part of the initial setting process and the software delay process, the payout control CPU 659 receives the payout start command. Waiting.

  Thus, for example, the game control microcomputer 99 does not check the output signal state of the clear switch 921 even though the payout control CPU 659 checks the state of the output signal of the clear switch 921. The situation is prevented from occurring. On the contrary, the game control microcomputer 99 performs the check process of the output signal state of the clear switch 921, but the payout control CPU 659 does not perform the check process of the output signal state of the clear switch 921. Is prevented from occurring. That is, the contents of each storage means in both the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer can be reliably initialized based on the operation of the operation means.

  When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the voltage of the DC + 24V power supply also gradually decreases. However, when the voltage of the DC + 24V power supply falls below a predetermined value, the power supply monitoring circuit 920 outputs a power-off signal (set to a low level). ). The power-off signal is input to the main board 120 and the payout control board 98. The game control means mounted on the main board 120 and the payout control means mounted on the payout control board 98 perform the power supply stop process (also referred to as the power-off control process) in response to the output of the power-off signal. Say). The power supply monitoring circuit 920 sets the reset signal to a low level when VCC falls below a predetermined value. The game control means mounted on the main board 120 and the payout control means mounted on the payout control board 98 are system reset in response to the reset signal becoming low level. That is, the game control microcomputer 99 and the payout control CPU 659 are not operated. Note that the power supply monitoring circuit 920 sets the reset signal to a low level when a predetermined time elapses from the time when the power supply cutoff signal is output when the power supply voltage decreases.

  Next, the gaming machine control process after step S21 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart for explaining a program for timer interrupt processing. When a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main process, specifically, during a period in which interrupts are permitted during the execution of the loop process of steps S16 to S19, the game control microcomputer 99 In the timer interrupt process activated in response to the occurrence of the game, the gaming device control process after step S21 is executed. In the timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 99 first performs a power-off process in step S21. In the power-off process, a power-off process (power-off detection process) for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed.

  In step S22, a switch process is performed. In the switch processing, the states of the switches such as the gate switch 62, the start port switch 60, the count switch 52, the winning ball detectors 55a, 55b, 56a, 56b, and the specific ball detector 51 are input, and the detection states thereof are determined. Processing is performed. Specifically, if the state of the input port for inputting the detection signal of each switch is ON, the value of the switch timer provided corresponding to each switch is incremented by one.

  In step S22a, a display control process is performed. In the display control process, a drive signal for controlling the display state of the special symbol display device 44a and the normal symbol display device 63 and a drive signal for controlling the lighting state of the special symbol start memory LED 67 and the special symbol start memory LED 68 are displayed. Output processing is performed.

  In step S22b, an abnormal winning notification process is performed. In the abnormal winning notification process, when the special variable winning ball device 48 is not opened, the abnormal winning game is performed when the count switch 52 provided in the special variable winning ball device 48 is set to the ON state. A process of setting an abnormal winning notification command for notifying that the player is performing is performed.

  In step S23, random number update processing is performed. In the random number update process, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a big hit determination random number used for game control is performed.

  In step S24 and step S25, processing for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number is performed.

  In step S26, special symbol process processing is performed. In the special symbol process process, a process for selecting and executing the corresponding process is performed according to the value of the special symbol process flag for controlling the ball game machine 1 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The value of the special symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state. In the special symbol process in the present embodiment, when a gaming machine error state signal is input from the payout control microcomputer 660, a payout prohibiting command is set to indicate that the payout is prohibited due to the occurrence of an error. Processing is performed.

  In step S27, normal symbol process processing is performed. In the normal symbol process, a process for selecting and executing the corresponding process is performed according to the value of the normal symbol process flag for controlling the lighting of the normal symbol display device 63 in a predetermined manner. The value of the normal symbol process flag is updated during each process according to the gaming state.

  In step S28, effect symbol command control processing is performed. In the effect symbol command control process, a process of outputting the command (including the payout prohibition command) set in step S26 and the like to the effect control microcomputer 118 is performed.

  In step S30, an information output process is performed. In the information output processing, game information necessary for business management of the ball game machine 1 (for example, jackpot 1 information for notifying that the jackpot gaming state is in effect, a probability hitting pattern becomes a jackpot gaming state, and during the jackpot state and 2 jackpot information that informs that the probability change due to jackpot is in progress (a signal that continues to be output during the jackpot and the probability fluctuation), probability variation information that reports that the probability change after the jackpot state is ended by the probability variation pattern, Starting port information for informing the number of hit balls with the starting port switch 60 turned on, symbol determining number 1 information for informing the number of fluctuation operations of the special symbol display device 44a, and a symbol for informing the number of fluctuation operations of the normal symbol display device 63 Information on the number of times of confirmation 2 and information on the number of times of function that notifies the number of times of opening and closing of the normally variable winning ball apparatus 58 are output to the hall management computer installed in the game hall. Treatment of the eye is performed.

  In step S31, a prize ball process is performed. In the prize ball processing, the number of prize balls is set based on a detection signal from a switch for detecting a prize at each prize opening. For example, a prize ball control signal indicating the number of prize balls is output to the payout control board 98 in response to winning detection. The payout control microcomputer mounted on the payout control board 98 drives the ball payout device 154 in response to receiving a prize ball control signal indicating the number of prize balls.

  In step S31a, a test terminal process is performed. In the test terminal processing, settings during special symbol change, special symbols, special variable winning ball device 48 operating setting, normal variable winning ball device 58 operating setting, probability variation state setting, normal symbol changing setting The process of outputting each signal such as is executed.

  In step S31b, an output process is performed. In the output process, an output process for outputting a drive signal for driving the corresponding solenoid when a predetermined condition is satisfied is performed. Based on the drive signal output in the output process, the solenoid is driven, and the corresponding device is controlled to an open state or a closed state.

  In step S32, a storage process is performed. In the storage process, a process of setting a drive signal for controlling the lighting state of the special symbol start storage LED 67 and the normal symbol start storage LED 68 is performed.

  In step S33, a special symbol display control process is performed. In the special symbol display control process, a process for setting a drive signal for controlling the display state of the special symbol display device 44a is performed. In step S34, a normal symbol display control process is performed. In the normal symbol display control process, a process for setting a drive signal for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display device 63 is performed.

  In step S34a, a status indicator display process is performed. In the status display lamp display process, a status display lamp display process for controlling the status display lamp is performed. In the status indicator display processing in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the variation time reduction state, the status indicator lamp is updated, the status indicator blink setting, and the status indicator blink Processing for setting the speed and the like is performed. In step S35, processing for setting the interrupt permitted state is performed. As a result, the interrupt is not enabled until all of the timer interrupt processing is executed, so no other interrupts or next timer interrupts are generated, and all timer interrupt processing is in progress. Each process can be reliably completed.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the gaming device control process after step S21 is started periodically (for example, every 2 ms). In this embodiment, the gaming device control process after step S21 is executed in the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set. The gaming device control process after S21 may be executed in the main process. Moreover, the process of step S1-S35 is corresponded to the game control process which controls progress of a game.

  FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 are flowcharts showing an example of the power-off process in step S20. In the power-off process, the game control microcomputer 99 first checks whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not it is turned on) (step S450). If not on, the value of the backup monitoring timer formed in the RAM 111 is cleared to 0 (step S451). If it is ON, the value of the backup monitoring timer is incremented by 1 (step S452). If the value of the backup monitoring timer matches the determination value (for example, 2) (step S453), the power supply stop process after step S454, that is, the preparation process for power supply stop is executed. That is, the state shifts from a state in which the progress of the game is controlled to a state in which a power supply stop process (a power-off control process) for saving the game state is executed. Note that “formed in RAM” means an area in the RAM.

  By using the backup monitoring timer and the determination value, if the power-off signal is kept on for a time corresponding to the determination value, the power supply stop process is started. That is, even if the power-off signal is turned on for a moment due to noise or the like, the power supply stop process is not erroneously started. Note that the value of the backup monitoring timer is stored by the backup power source for a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Therefore, in step S8 in the main process, it can be confirmed that the processing result of the power supply stop process is stored because the value of the backup monitoring timer is the same as the determination value.

  In the power supply stop process, the game control microcomputer 99 creates parity data (steps S454 to S463). That is, first, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area (step S454), and the checksum calculation start address corresponding to the start address of the RAM area in which the contents are to be stored even when power supply is stopped is set in the pointer. (Step S455). Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the final address of the RAM area where the contents are to be stored even when the power supply is stopped is set (step S456).

  Next, an exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated (step S457). The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area (step S458), the pointer value is incremented by 1 (step S459), and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1 (step S460). Then, the processes in steps S457 to S460 are repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0 (step S461).

  When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the game control microcomputer 99 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area (step S462). Then, the inverted data is stored in the checksum data area (step S463). This data becomes parity data to be checked when the power is turned on. Next, an access prohibition value is set in the RAM access register (step S471). Thereafter, the built-in RAM 111 cannot be accessed.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 99 sets the head address of the port clear setting table stored in the ROM 100 as a pointer (step S472). In the port clear setting table, the number of processes (the number of output ports to be cleared) is set to the head address, and then the output port address and output value data (clear data: the value of the off state of each bit of the output port) However, the number of output ports corresponding to the number of processes is sequentially set.

  The game control microcomputer 99 loads data at the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, the number of processes) (step S473). Further, the value of the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S474), and the data at the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, the output port address) is loaded (step S475). Further, the value of the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S476), and the data of the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, output value data) is loaded (step S477). Then, the output value data is output to the output port (step S478). Thereafter, the number of processes is reduced by 1 (step S479), and if the number of processes is not 0, the process returns to step S474. If the number of processes is 0, that is, if all the output ports to be cleared are cleared, the timer interrupt is stopped (step S481) and the loop process is started.

  In the loop processing, it is monitored whether or not the power-off signal is turned off (step S482). When the power-off signal is turned off, the power-on execution address (the address of step S1) is set as the return address and the return instruction is executed (step S483), and the timer is allocated by RETI (Return from interrupt). The process ends, and the process returns to the main process. Specifically, a state in which a gaming device provided in the gaming machine is controlled (concept including both controlling by itself and transmitting a command signal to cause another microcomputer to control). Return.

  In the loop process, it is monitored whether or not the reset signal is in a low level on state (step S484). When the reset signal is turned on, that is, when it is confirmed by the game control microcomputer 99 that the reset signal is turned on, the game control microcomputer 99 enters the system reset state (system Reset). That is, the game control microcomputer 99 is returned to the operation stop state which is the start state (step S485). As described above, the voltage level of the detection voltage for turning on the reset signal in the present embodiment is set to +4.5 V, which is higher than the drive voltage (for example, 4 V) of the game control microcomputer 99. As a result, the gaming control microcomputer 99 is actively stopped even when a voltage higher than the drive voltage is still being supplied.

  When the power supply is stopped by the above process, the power supply stop process in steps S454 to S481 is executed, and data indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed (specified value with backup and checksum) Is stored in the backup RAM, the RAM access is prohibited, the output port is cleared, and the timer interrupt for executing the gaming machine control process after step S21 is set to the prohibited state.

  In this embodiment, the RAM 111 is backed up by a backup power source (the contents of the RAM 111 are preserved for a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped). In this example, the checksum based on the contents of the RAM 111 when the power-off signal is output is stored in the backup area of the RAM 111 together with the value of the backup monitoring timer by the processing in steps S452 to S479. After the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the game control means performs the processing in steps S91 to S94 described above to store the data stored in the RAM 111 (the game in the control state by the game control means immediately before the power supply is stopped). Return the gaming state to the state just before the power supply stopped according to the data indicating the state (for example, including the state of the process flag, the state of the big hit flag, the state of the probability change flag, the output state of the output port, etc.) Can do. If the power supply stop period exceeds the predetermined period, the value of the backup monitoring timer and the checksum should be different from the regular values. In this case, the initialization process of steps S10 to S14 is executed. The

  As described above, the process for storing the gaming control (this example) ensures that the data for returning the gaming state to the state immediately before the power supply is stopped by the power supply stopping process (preparation process for stopping the power supply). Then, it is stored in a partial area of the RAM 111. Therefore, even if the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, the gaming state can be returned to the state immediately before the power supply is stopped.

  If the power-off signal is turned off, the process returns to step S1. In this case, since data indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set, the game state recovery process of steps S91 to S94 is executed. Therefore, when the power-off signal from the payout control board 98 is turned off after executing the power supply stop process, the process returns to the state of controlling the progress of the game. Therefore, even if a power interruption or the like occurs, the game control process does not stop, and the game control process is automatically continued.

  Note that the connection confirmation signal transmitted to the payout control board 98 is set to the off state by the process of clearing the output port. In the setting of the work area in steps S92 and S12, the content of the output port buffer corresponding to the connection confirmation signal is set to a value corresponding to the ON state of the connection confirmation signal. When the prize ball processing in step S31 is executed, the contents of the output port buffer are output to the output port, so that the connection confirmation signal to the payout control board 98 is turned on. Therefore, the connection confirmation signal is output (turned on) when the main board 120 rises. Note that a connection confirmation signal is also output when the power supply is recovered from an instantaneous power interruption or the like.

  Next, the switch process (step S21) in the main process will be described. In this embodiment, when the ON state of the detection signal of each switch related to winning detection or gate passage continues for a predetermined time, it is determined that the switch is surely turned on, and processing corresponding to the switch on is started. FIG. 37 is an explanatory diagram showing each 1-byte buffer formed in the RAM 111 used in the switch process. The previous port buffer is a buffer that stores the previous switch-on / off determination result (for example, 2 ms before). The port buffer is a buffer in which the contents of port 0 inputted this time are stored. The switch-on buffer is a buffer in which the corresponding bit is set to 1 when switch on is detected and the corresponding bit is set to 0 when switch off is detected.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating a processing example of the switch processing in step S21 in the game control processing. In the switch process, the game control microcomputer 99 first inputs the data input to the input port 0 (see FIG. 29) (step S101), and sets the input data in the port buffer (step S102). Next, the initial value of the weight counter formed in the RAM 111 is set (step S103), and the value of the weight counter is decremented by 1 until the value of the weight counter becomes 0 (steps S104 and S105).

  When the value of the wait counter reaches 0, the data of the input port 0 is input again (step S106), and a logical product is obtained for each bit between the input data and the data set in the port buffer (step S106). S107). Then, the logical product operation result is set in the port buffer (step S108). Of the two input data input from the input port 0 with a time interval of approximately [initial value of weight counter × (processing time of steps S104, S105)] by the processing of steps S103 to S108, both “ Only the bits that are “1” will be “1” in the port buffer. That is, if the ON state of the switch detection signal continues for the predetermined period [initial value of wait counter × (processing time of steps S104 and S105)], the corresponding bit in the port buffer becomes “1”.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 99 performs exclusive OR for each bit between the data previously set in the port buffer and the data set in the port buffer (step S119). In the result of the exclusive OR operation, the bit corresponding to the switch for which the previous switch-on / off determination result (for example, 2 ms before) differs from the switch-on / off determination result determined to be on this time is “ 1 ”. The game control microcomputer 99 further performs a logical product for each bit between the result of the exclusive OR operation and the data set in the port buffer (step S110). As a result, of the bits corresponding to the switches for which the previous switch on / off determination result and the switch on / off determination result determined to be on this time are different (according to the exclusive OR operation result), the current on Only the bit corresponding to the switch determined as (by the logical product operation) remains as “1”.

  Then, the game control microcomputer 99 sets the logical product operation result in step S110 in the switch-on buffer (step S111), and sets the contents of the port buffer in which the operation result in step S108 is set in the previous port buffer. (Step S112).

  Through the above processing, among the switches that have been on for a predetermined period of time, the switch that has been turned off last time (for example, 2 ms before), that is, the switch that has been turned off, that is, changed from the off state to the on state The bit corresponding to the switch is “1” in the switch-on buffer.

  Next, control signals transmitted and received between the main board 120 and the payout control board 98 will be described. FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a control signal output from the game control means to the payout control means. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of control signals are transmitted and received between the main board 120 and the payout control board 98 in order to perform various controls relating to payout control and the like. As shown in FIG. 39, the connection confirmation signal is output when the main board 120 rises (when the game control means starts the game control process), indicating that the main board 120 has risen with respect to the payout control board 98. This is a signal for notification (connection confirmation signal for the main board 120). The connection confirmation signal indicates that the winning ball can be paid out. In this embodiment, since the game control means transmits the payout activation command before starting the game control process in step S6 and subsequent steps in FIG. 30, the connection confirmation signal need not be used. When the connection confirmation signal is not used, the payout activation command also serves as a signal indicating that the prize ball can be paid out.

  The prize ball REQ signal is a signal that is in an output state (= ON state) when a prize ball payout request is issued or when a payout activation command is transmitted. In addition, the award ball REQ signal becomes a stopped state (off state = all 0 state) when the award ball BUSY signal is turned on after the payout control means is turned on. The award ball control signal is used as a signal (award ball number command, award ball number signal) that is output to designate the number of game balls (1 to 15) that make a payout request.

  The award ball BUSY signal is a signal that is turned on when the payout control means confirms the on state of the award ball REQ signal at the time of a prize ball payout request, and is turned off after a predetermined period. That is, it corresponds to an acceptance confirmation signal for the prize ball REQ signal. Therefore, the state in which the prize ball BUSY signal is OFF corresponds to a state of waiting for a prize ball number command reception.

  FIG. 40 is a block diagram showing signal lines and the like used for transmission / reception of each control signal shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 40, the connection confirmation signal, the prize ball REQ signal, and the prize ball control signal are output by the game control microcomputer 99 via the output circuit 662, and to the payout control CPU 659 via the input circuit 663A. Entered. The award ball BUSY signal is output via the output circuit 663B by the payout control CPU 659 and input to the game control microcomputer 99 via the input circuit 666. Each of the connection confirmation signal, the prize ball REQ signal, and the prize ball BUSY signal is 1-bit data, and is transmitted through one signal line. The prize ball control signal designates 1 to 15 prize ball payouts, and is also used as a payout activation command, so is composed of 5-bit data and transmitted by 5 signal lines. As described above, the clear signal, the power-off signal, and the reset signal are input from the power supply board 910 to the main board 120 and the payout control board 98 in the present embodiment. A backup power supply or the like is also supplied from the power supply board 910.

  FIG. 41 is a timing chart showing an example of how to output a prize ball control signal. As shown in FIG. 41, the game control means transmits a payout start command (payout start command) to the payout control means in connection with the start of power supply to the gaming machine. Specifically, 10 (H) is output as a prize ball control signal, and the prize ball REQ signal is turned on.

  Further, when the winning of the game ball is detected, the game control means turns on the prize ball REQ signal and sets the output state of the prize ball control signal to a state corresponding to the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize. To do. In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the start opening switch 60, four prize balls are paid out, and the game ball is detected by any of the winning ball detectors 55a, 55b, 56a, 56b. 7 prize balls are paid out, and when a game ball is detected by the specific ball detector 51 or the count switch 52, 15 prize balls are paid out. As described above, since the prize ball control signal is composed of 5 bits, the lower 5 bits of the prize ball number commands of 00 (H) to 0F (H) represented by 8 bits are The prize ball control signal is transmitted from the main board 120 to the payout control board 98. Hereinafter, the prize ball control signal may be expressed as “00 (H) to 0F (H) prize ball control signal”, but in reality, the prize ball control signal is represented by 8 bits. This corresponds to the lower 5 bits of 0F (H). When the prize ball control signal is used for transmitting the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with winning, the most significant bit (bit 4) is 0.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing an example of the prize ball processing in step S31. In the prize ball process, the game control microcomputer 99 executes a prize ball number addition process (step S201) and a prize ball control process (step S202). Then, the contents of the port 0 buffer formed in the RAM 111 are output to port 0 (step S203). The contents of the port 0 buffer are updated in the prize ball control process.

  In the prize ball number adding process, a prize ball number table shown in FIG. 43 is used. The prize ball number table is set in the ROM 100. The number of processes (in this example, “7”) is set in the head address of the winning ball number table, and thereafter, the lower address of the switch-on buffer, and each switch of the winning opening that will pay out the winning ball by winning. The switch input bit determination value and the number of winning balls are sequentially set corresponding to each switch of the winning opening. The switch input bit determination value is a value corresponding to the bit to which the detection signal of each switch at the input port 0 is input (see FIG. 29). The upper address of the switch-on buffer is a fixed value (for example, 7F (H)). In the prize ball number table, the same data is set in each of the lower addresses of the seven switch-on buffers.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the prize ball number adding process. In the winning ball number adding process, the game control microcomputer 99 sets the start address of the winning ball number table in the pointer (step S211). Then, the data at the address pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the number of processes) is loaded (step S212). Next, the upper address (8 bits) of the switch-on buffer is set in the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte check pointer (step S213).

  Then, the pointer value is incremented by 1 (step S214), and the data of the prize ball number table pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the lower address of the switch-on buffer) is set in the lower 1 byte of the check pointer (step S215). The pointer value is increased by 1 (step S216). Next, the address data pointed to by the check pointer, that is, the contents of the switch-on buffer is loaded into the register (step S217), and the loaded contents and the data of the prize ball number table pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the switch input bit judgment value) ) And the logical product (step S218). As a result, 7 bits other than the bit corresponding to the detection signal of the switch to be inspected become 0 in the register loaded with the contents of the switch-on buffer. Then, the pointer value is incremented by 1 (step S219).

  If the calculation result in step S218 is 0, that is, if the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is on, the prize ball number table data pointed to by the pointer (in this case, the prize ball number) is used as the prize ball addition value. (Steps S220 and S221), and the prize value addition value is added to the contents of the 16-bit total prize ball number storage buffer formed in the RAM 111 (Step S222). If a carry occurs as a result of the addition, the content of the total number of winning balls storage buffer is set to 65535 (= FFFF (H)) (steps S223 and 224).

  In step S225, the number of processes is reduced by 1. If the number of processes is 0, the process ends. If the number of processes is not 0, the process returns to step S214 (step S226). In step S220, when it is confirmed that the calculation result in step S218 is 0, that is, the detection signal of the switch to be inspected is in the OFF state, the process proceeds to step S225.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the prize ball control process in step S201. In the prize ball control process, the game control microcomputer 99 executes any one of steps S231 to S234 according to the value of the prize ball process code.

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the winning ball waiting process 1 (step S231) executed when the value of the winning ball process code is zero. In the award ball waiting process 1, the game control microcomputer 99 checks whether or not the award ball BUSY signal is on (step S241). At this stage, the prize ball BUSY signal should not be in the ON state. Therefore, when the prize ball BUSY signal is in the ON state, the prize ball abnormal state output value (40 (H)) is stored in the port 0 buffer. To complete the processing (step S242). When the prize ball abnormal state output value is set in the port 0 buffer, the contents of the port 0 buffer are outputted to port 0 in step S203 (see FIG. 42), so that the prize ball REQ signal, connection confirmation signal, and All the prize ball control signals are turned off (see FIG. 27).

  If the prize ball BUSY signal is off, the prize ball standby output value (60 (H)) is set in the port 0 buffer (step S243). When the output value during waiting for a prize ball is set in the port 0 buffer, the contents of the port 0 buffer are output to port 0 in step S203, whereby the prize ball REQ signal is turned off, and the connection confirmation signal The on state is maintained (see FIG. 27). In addition, the prize ball control signal enters an invalid command (00 (H)). Next, it is confirmed whether or not the prize ball timer is 0 (step S244). If the prize ball timer is not 0, the value of the prize ball timer is decreased by 1 (step S245), and the process is terminated. The prize ball timer is a timer for measuring the time required for prize ball processing. At this stage, if the value of the prize ball timer is not 0, the next prize ball after the previous payout process is completed. Waiting time until the REQ signal is turned on (time for providing an interval between ON periods of a plurality of prize ball REQ signals when prize ball payout is continuously executed, 00 (H ) Means that the prize ball control signal is being output). The prize ball timer is set in step S275 of the prize ball waiting process 3 described later. In addition, after the execution of the prize ball waiting process 3 in step S234 is completed and the previous payout process is completed, the processes of steps S243 to S245 are turned off and the prize ball REQ signal is turned off and invalid as a prize ball control signal. This is a process for outputting a command (00 (H)).

  If the value of the prize ball timer is 0, the game control microcomputer 99 then checks the contents of the total prize ball number storage buffer (step S247). If the value is 0, the process ends. If not, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 1 (step S248), and the process ends.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a prize ball transmission process (step S232) executed when the value of the prize ball process code is 1. In the prize ball transmission process, the game control microcomputer 99 checks whether or not the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is smaller than the prize ball command maximum value (“15” in this example) (step S251). If the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is equal to or greater than the prize ball command maximum value, the prize ball command maximum value is set in the prize ball number buffer (step S252). If the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is smaller than the maximum value of the prize ball command, the content of the total prize ball number storage buffer is set in the prize ball number buffer (step S253).

  Thereafter, the output value (20 (H)) during the prize ball REQ is set in the output port 0 buffer (step S254). When the output value in the prize ball REQ is set in the output port 0 buffer, the contents of the output port 0 buffer are outputted to the port 0 in step S203, so that the prize ball REQ signal is turned on and the connection confirmation is made. The on state of the signal is maintained (see FIG. 27). Further, the contents of the winning ball number buffer are set in the lower 4 bits of the output port 0 buffer (step S255). Thereafter, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 2 (step S256), and the process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, the maximum value of the prize ball command is “15”. Accordingly, a prize ball control signal designating the maximum number of payouts of “15” is transmitted to the payout control board 98.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the winning ball waiting process 2 (step S233) executed when the value of the winning ball process code is 2. In the game control microcomputer 99, the prize ball BUSY signal output (turned on) by the payout control means in response to the prize ball REQ being turned on in the prize ball waiting process 2 is turned on. It is confirmed whether or not (step S261). When the on-state is not turned on, a BUSY start determination time value (for example, 2) is set in the prize ball timer (step S262). The BUSY start determination time value is a value for the game control means to confirm that the prize ball BUSY signal has been output (turned on) if the prize ball BUSY signal is on for the time indicated by the value. is there.

  Therefore, the game control microcomputer 99 confirms the value of the prize ball timer when the prize ball BUSY signal is turned on (step S263). Step S264), the process ends. When the value of the prize ball timer becomes 0, it is determined that the prize ball BUSY signal is turned on, and the contents of the prize ball number buffer are changed from the contents of the total prize ball number storage buffer (the number of prize balls paid out to the payout control means). Is subtracted (step S265). Then, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 3 (step S266), and the process is terminated.

  In the prize ball transmission process shown in FIG. 47 and the prize ball waiting process 2 shown in FIG. 48, the game control means sends a prize ball BUSY signal from the payout control means within a predetermined period after sending the prize ball control signal. When the game is not received, control for stopping the progress of the game may be performed. Specifically, in the prize ball transmission process shown in FIG. 47, the game control microcomputer 99 turns on the prize ball REQ signal (step S255), and then monitors the prize ball BUSY on monitor value (here. The monitoring timer is a timer for detecting the occurrence of a communication abnormality, and the prize ball BUSY on monitoring value is a value until the prize ball BUSY signal is turned on when the payout control means and the communication line are normal. It is a value corresponding to the time when the time is given). In the award ball waiting process 2 shown in FIG. 48, the game control microcomputer 99 confirms whether or not the award ball BUSY signal is turned on (step S261). 1 is subtracted from the value of. When the value of the monitoring timer becomes 0, the gaming control microcomputer 99 determines that an abnormality in communication with the payout control means has occurred, specifically, the prize ball BUSY signal is turned on. If not, control is performed to stop the progress of the game.

  The game control means clears the output state of the output port after saving the current control state, for example, the output state of the output port, in the RAM 111 before stopping the progress of the game. Then, the progress of the game is stopped until the abnormality of communication with the payout control means is resolved. In other words, even if a new event (game ball winning etc.) occurs, the corresponding process is not performed, and for example, a newly generated event is stored. The game control means transmits a communication error display command to the effect control means of the effect control board 90 in order to notify the occurrence of communication abnormality using the decorative symbol display device 44b or the like before stopping the progress of the game. It is configured as follows. When the communication abnormality is resolved, the game control means can restore the output port based on the control state stored in the RAM 111.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the winning ball waiting process 3 (step S234) executed when the value of the winning ball process code is 3. In the award ball waiting process 3, the game control microcomputer 99 confirms whether or not the award ball BUSY signal is turned off (step S271). When not in the off state, a BUSY end determination time value (for example, 3) is set in the prize ball timer (step S272). The BUSY end determination time value is a value for setting the time from when the prize ball BUSY signal is turned off to when the prize ball REQ signal is turned off.

  Accordingly, the game control microcomputer 99 checks the value of the prize ball timer when the prize ball BUSY signal is turned off (step S273), and if the value is not 0, the value of the prize ball timer is decreased by 1 ( Step S274), the process is terminated. When the value of the prize ball timer becomes 0, the prize ball REQ waiting time is set in the prize ball timer (step S275). The prize ball REQ signal is turned off in step S243 of the prize ball waiting process 1. Then, the value of the prize ball process code is set to 0 (step S276), and the process is terminated. The award ball REQ waiting time is a waiting time until the next award ball REQ signal is turned on (when consecutive award ball payouts are executed, during the on periods of a plurality of award ball REQ signals). Time for providing an interval).

  Through the above processing, the game control means stores the total number of game balls as prize balls to be paid out based on the establishment of the payout condition in the total prize ball number storage buffer so as to be specified. The total award ball number storage buffer corresponds to a prize game medium number storage means for storing stored contents for at least a predetermined period by a backup power source as a variable data storage means when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Further, the game control means transmits a payout command signal for designating a payout number of a predetermined number of prize balls to the payout control means based on the number of prize balls stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer. Here, the predetermined number is 15 if the number of prize balls stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer is 15 or more, and is stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer if it is less than 15. The number of prize balls. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, a subtraction process is performed for subtracting the number of payouts specified by the payout command signal from the number of prize balls stored in the total prize ball number storage buffer.

  In this embodiment, the predetermined condition for executing the subtraction process is when a command acceptance signal is received from the payout control means, specifically when the prize ball BUSY signal is turned on. When the prize ball BUSY signal is turned on, the payout control means has not yet paid out the number of prize balls instructed by the payout command signal. If configured to perform subtraction processing of the total prize ball number storage buffer when the prize ball payout is completed, an illegal act of restoring the power supply after illegally stopping the power supply of the gaming machine during the prize ball payout As a result, a large number of prize balls are illegally paid out. For example, when 15 prize ball payouts are instructed by a payout command signal, when 10 prize ball payouts are made, if the power supply is restored after illegally stopping the power supply of the gaming machine, Since the contents of the total number of winning balls storage buffer are not subtracted at all, it is assumed that the ten winning balls are not paid out even though ten winning balls are actually paid out. Control will continue.

  However, in this embodiment, when the winning ball BUSY signal is turned on, that is, when the payout control means accepts the payout command signal and transmits the command acceptance signal, the total winning ball number storage buffer subtraction process is executed. Therefore, the above fraud can be prevented.

  However, when the game control means sets the output state of the prize ball control signal to a state according to the number of prize balls to be paid out in accordance with the winning, specifically when the game ball control signal is output to the output port 0 More specifically, when the contents of the winning ball number buffer are set in the lower 4 bits of the output port 0 buffer, the total winning ball number storing buffer may be subtracted.

  In this embodiment, as the prize game medium number storage means for storing the total number of premium game media to be paid out based on the establishment of the payout condition, a total prize ball number storage buffer for storing the total number itself is exemplified. However, the prize game medium number storage means for storing the total number of the prize game media in an identifiable manner stores the number of prizes received in each prize area, or the number of prizes for each prize area (for example, the same number of prize balls) (for example, It is the number of winning prizes in the start opening 58a corresponding to the number of four winning balls, winning holes 53a, 53b, 54a, 54b corresponding to the number of seven winning balls, and the large winning opening corresponding to the number of 15 winning balls. And the number of winnings that have not yet been paid out).

  Next, the operation of the payout control means (the payout control microcomputer 660 and the I / O port) will be described. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of output port assignment in the payout control means. As shown in FIG. 50, the output port 0 is an output port for outputting a signal of each phase supplied to the firing motor 601 by the stepping motor and a signal of each phase supplied to the payout motor 115 by the stepping motor. It is. Further, the output port 1 is an output port for outputting a ball-out LED 9 and a prize ball LED 10 and an award ball signal, award ball information, a ball rental information, and a gaming machine error status signal outputted to the outside of the gaming machine. is there. The output port 2 is an output port for outputting each segment of the error display LED 664 using a 7-segment LED. Although not shown in FIG. 50, the payout control board 98 outputs an output port for outputting a prize ball BUSY signal to the main board 120 and an EXS signal and a PRDY signal to the card unit device 731. An output port is also provided.

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of bit assignment of input ports in the payout control means. As shown in FIG. 51, a 5-bit prize ball control signal is input to bits 0 to 4 of input port 0, and a connection confirmation signal from main board 120 and main board 120 are input to bits 5 to 7, respectively. Receives a prize ball REQ signal and a detection signal from the payout sensor board 114. In addition, bits 0 to 3 of the input port 1 respectively include a touch sensor signal (launch control signal) from the touch ring 110, a detection signal from the payout count switch 116, an operation signal from the error release switch 665, and a full switch. 158 detection signals are input. Bits 4 to 7 of the input port 1 are inputted with a VL signal, a BRDY signal, a BRQ signal from the card unit device 731 and a detection signal of the ball break switch 157, respectively. An output signal, a reset signal, and a power-off signal from the clear switch 921 from the power supply board 910 are input to the input port 2.

  Next, the operation of the payout control means will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the payout control means. When power supply to the gaming machine is started and the reset signal becomes high level, the payout control microcomputer 660 starts main processing. In the main process, the payout control microcomputer 660 first performs necessary initial settings. That is, the payout control microcomputer 660 first sets the interruption prohibition (step S701). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S702), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S703). The payout control CPU 659 initializes the built-in device register (step S704), and initializes CTC and PIO (step S705).

  In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in the timer mode. Accordingly, in the built-in device register setting process in step S704 and the process in step S705, register setting for setting the channel to be used to timer mode, register setting for permitting interrupt generation, and setting an interrupt vector. The register is set. The interrupt by the channel is used as a timer interrupt. For example, when it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 2 ms, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value.

  The interrupt vector set for the channel set to the timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the start address of the timer interrupt process. Specifically, the start address of the timer interrupt process is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. In the timer interruption process, a payout device control process after step S749 for controlling the payout means and the like (including at least a process of driving the ball payout device 154 in response to a command signal related to paying out a prize ball from the main board, A process of driving the ball dispensing device 154 in response to the lending request may be included.

  In this embodiment, the interruption mode 2 is also set in the payout control microcomputer 660. Therefore, it is possible to use an interrupt process based on counting up the built-in CTC. Also, an interrupt processing start address can be set according to the interrupt vector sent by the CTC.

  An interrupt based on CTC channel 3 (CH3) count-up is an interrupt that occurs when the CPU internal clock (system clock) counts down and the register value becomes “0”, and is used as a timer interrupt. . Specifically, a clock obtained by dividing the operation clock of the CPU 659 is supplied to the CTC, the register value is subtracted by the input of the clock, and when the register value becomes 0, a timer interrupt is generated. The processing so far corresponds to a part of the initial setting processing shown in FIG.

  Next, the payout control microcomputer 660 sets a value corresponding to the monitoring time for confirming that the payout start command has been transmitted from the main board 120 in a general-purpose register (HL register or BC register) (step). S720).

  The payout control CPU 659 included in the payout control microcomputer 660 is a register that reflects the state when a signal that causes an interrupt (low level in this example) is input to the interrupt terminal. And a CPU having an external interrupt request register which is one of the specific registers. In this embodiment, it is assumed that bit 7 of the external interrupt request register is set to “1” when a signal of a level that causes an interrupt is input to the interrupt terminal. That is, the value of the external interrupt request register is updated to 80 (H). The setting / resetting of the bits of the external interrupt request register cannot be executed by software, but is performed by an internal mechanism of the CPU. It is assumed that bits 0 to 6 of the external interrupt request register are always 0. Also, regardless of whether the interrupt disabled state is set or not, if a level that causes an interrupt is input to the interrupt terminal, bit 7 of the external interrupt request register is set to “1”. The

  The payout control CPU 659 checks whether the bit 7 of the external interrupt request register is set to “1” while decrementing the value of the general-purpose register by 1 (steps S721 to S723). If bit 7 of the external interrupt request register is set before the value of the general-purpose register becomes 0, that is, before the monitoring time elapses, the process proceeds to step S721a. If the monitoring time elapses before bit 7 of the external interrupt request register is set, after setting a predetermined bit (which can be arbitrarily determined) of a predetermined general-purpose register used as an unstartable flag (step S724), The process proceeds to step S706. In this embodiment, the prize ball REQ signal from the main board 120 is input to the interrupt terminal of the payout control CPU 659. Therefore, if the monitoring time has elapsed before bit 7 of the external interrupt request register is set, it means that the game control means could not confirm that the payout start command was transmitted within the predetermined monitoring time. To do. Therefore, an inactivation flag indicating that is set.

  The fact that bit 7 of the external interrupt request register is set before the monitoring time elapses means that the prize ball REQ signal is turned on. That is, it means that the game control means of the main board 120 has turned on the prize ball REQ signal in order to transmit the payout activation command by the prize ball control signal.

  In this embodiment, when it is confirmed in step S721 that bit 7 of the external interrupt request register is set to “1”, the timing for inputting (capturing) a prize ball control signal is set by software. Execute software delay processing to delay. Specifically, first, a take-in weight designation value is set in the wait counter 3 (step S721a). As the wait counter 3, a general-purpose register (HL register or BC register) built in the payout control microcomputer 660 is used. Then, the value of the wait counter 3 is decremented by 1 until the value of the wait counter 3 becomes 0 (steps S721b and S721c). If the value of the wait counter 3 is 0, the software delay process is terminated.

  As a result of the software delay processing as described above, the winning ball control signal is fetched by [(taken weight designation value) × (processing time of steps S721b and S721c)] as compared with the case where the software delay processing is not executed. Timing can be delayed. In other words, the value of the take-in weight designation value is determined so that the timing for taking in the prize ball control signal can be delayed by a desired time. Note that the value of the take-in weight designation value is preset in a ROM built in the payout control microcomputer 660. The software delay processing described here is an example, and the software delay processing may be realized by other methods.

  After confirming that the value of the wait counter 3 is 0 in step S721c and ending the software delay process, the payout control CPU 659 inputs a prize ball control signal via bits 0 to 4 of the input port 0 (step S721c). In S725), it is confirmed whether or not the input prize ball control signal is 10 (H) defined as the payout activation command (Step S726). If it is 10 (H), it is determined that a payout activation command has been received, and the process proceeds to step S706. If it is not 10 (H), after setting a predetermined bit of a predetermined general-purpose register used as an activation disable flag (step S724), the process proceeds to step S706.

  In step S706, the RAM is set to an accessible state (step S706). Further, 0000 (H) is set as an initial value of the award ball unpaid number counter (step S707). Next, if the activation disable flag (see step S724) is not set (step S727), the state of the output signal of the clear switch 921 input via the input port 2 is confirmed only once (step S708). When ON is detected in the confirmation, the payout control CPU 659 executes an initialization process (steps S712 to S715). If the clear switch 921 is not in the on state, whether or not data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped Confirmation is made (step S709). Whether or not the protection process has been performed depends on the value of the backup monitoring timer stored in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process described later according to the execution of the data protection process in the backup RAM area (for example, It is confirmed by whether or not 10). Note that such a confirmation method is merely an example. For example, a flag indicating that the data protection processing has been executed is set in the backup flag area in the power supply stop processing. In step S709, the flag is set. If it is confirmed that there is a backup, it may be determined that there is backup.

  Since the main process starts when power supply to the gaming machine is started, in this embodiment, the clear switch 921 is pressed at the start of power supply and the detection signal (detection to the main board 120 is detected). If the connection confirmation signal is received from the main board 120, the output state of the clear signal from the clear switch 921 is confirmed and cleared at that time. If the switch 921 is pressed, the initialization process may be executed. In such a configuration, the connection confirmation signal is received for a predetermined time (after the power supply starts, the game control means can start the game control process and output the connection confirmation signal before executing the process of step S708. Until the connection confirmation signal is received within the predetermined time, the process of step S708 is executed. If the connection confirmation signal is not received within the predetermined time, the process of step S709 is executed. do it.

  If it is determined that there is a backup, the payout control CPU 659 performs data check (parity check in this example) in the backup RAM area (step S710). In this embodiment, clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area, and the checksum calculation start address is set in the pointer. Also, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the number of data to be checksum is set. Then, the exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated. The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area, the pointer value is incremented by 1, and the checksum calculation count value is decremented by 1. The above processing is repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes zero. When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the game control microcomputer 99 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area, and uses the inverted data as the checksum.

In the power supply stop process described later, the checksum is calculated by the same process as the above process, and the checksum is stored in the backup RAM area. In step S710, the calculated checksum is compared with the stored checksum. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the payout control side recovery process is not executed, and the initialization process (the processes in steps S712 to S715) is executed.

  If the check result is normal, the payout control CPU 659 performs payout control side recovery processing. Specifically, the value of the award ball unpaid number counter formed in the backup RAM is set as the initial value of the award ball unpaid number counter (step S711). And the process after step S713 is performed.

  In the initialization process, the payout control microcomputer 660 first performs a RAM clear process (step S712). Also, the payout control microcomputer 660 sets initial values for the flags and counters in the RAM area (step S713). The process of step S713 includes a process of setting the initial value of the award ball unpaid number counter in the award ball unpaid number counter. Accordingly, when the payout control side restoration process (step S711) is executed, the value of the unsold prize ball number counter stored in the backup RAM is set again in the unsold prize ball number counter. In other words, the value of the award ball unpaid number counter stored in the backup RAM is used as it is. When the payout control side initialization process (step S712) is executed, the initial value stored in the ROM is set in the RAM area.

  If the start disable flag is set in the process of step S724, the start error bit in the error flag formed in the RAM is set (steps S714 and S715). Next, a CTC register provided in the payout control CPU 659 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated (step S716). That is, a value corresponding to the timer interrupt generation interval is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). Since interruption is prohibited in step S701 of the initial setting process, interruption is permitted before the initialization process is completed (step S717). Thereafter, a loop process for monitoring the occurrence of a timer interrupt is entered.

  As described above, the game control microcomputer 99 transmits the payout start command in the payout start command transmission process in step S5, and then executes the check process of the output state of the clear signal from the clear switch 921 in step S7. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S721 that bit 7 of the external interrupt request register is “1”, the payout control microcomputer 660 executes software delay processing in steps S721a to S721c, and then in step S725. The payout activation command is received, and a clear signal output state check process from the clear switch 921 is executed in step S708. Therefore, the check timing of the output state of the clear signal from the clear switch 921 of the game control means and the check timing of the output state of the clear signal from the clear switch 921 of the payout control means are substantially the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 660 is set to repeatedly generate a timer interrupt. When a timer interrupt occurs, the payout control microcomputer 660 executes a timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing executed by the payout control means. In the timer interrupt process, the payout control microcomputer 660 executes a power-off process for monitoring whether or not a power-off signal is output (step S749). Thereafter, the payout device control process after step S750 is executed. First, the payout control microcomputer 660 performs excitation pattern output processing for the firing motor 601 (output of the patterns of the firing motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0) (step S750). In the firing motor control process in step S752, the excitation pattern is stored in the excitation pattern buffer that is the RAM area. In step S750, the payout control microcomputer 660 stores the contents of the excitation pattern buffer in the lower 4 bits of the output port 0. Process to output to.

  Next, the payout control microcomputer 660 performs an input determination process (step S751). In the input determination process, the states of bits 5 and 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 7 of input port 1 (see FIG. 51) are detected, and the detection result is a predetermined 1 byte of RAM (referred to as an input state flag). It is a process to reflect on. In the control process of the payout device or the like, when control is performed based on the states of bits 5 and 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 7 of input port 1, the state of the input port is not directly checked. Check the status of the input status flag. Further, the input determination process includes a process of checking the states of the bits 0, 1, and 2 of the input port 1, that is, checking the states of the detection signals of the firing control signal, the payout number count switch, and the error release switch. Specifically, switch timers (launch control signal timer, payout number count switch timer, error release switch timer) corresponding to each of them are formed in the RAM, and it is detected in the switch check process that they are in the ON state. Then, the value of the corresponding switch timer is incremented by 1, and when it is detected that the switch is off, the value of the corresponding switch timer is cleared.

  Next, the dispensing control microcomputer 660 executes a firing motor control process (step S752). In the firing motor control process, the patterns of the firing motors φ1 to φ4 are stored in the excitation pattern buffer. When the firing motor 601 should be disabled, the patterns of the firing motors φ1 to φ4 that do not rotate the firing motor 601 are stored in the excitation pattern buffer. Further, the payout control microcomputer 660 executes a payout motor control process (step S753). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 115 is to be driven, a process for outputting the patterns of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 660 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit device 731 (step S754). Next, the payout control microcomputer 660 executes main control communication processing for communicating with the game control means of the main board 120 (step S755). Further, a prize ball lending control for performing a control for paying out a lending ball in response to a ball lending request from the card unit device 731 and for paying out the number of award balls indicated by a prize ball control signal from the main board. Processing is executed (step S756).

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 660 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S757). Further, an information output process for outputting prize ball information and ball lending information output to the outside of the gaming machine is executed (step S758). Further, predetermined display is performed on the error display LED 664 according to the result of the error processing, and display control processing for lighting the prize ball LED 10 and the ball out LED 9 is executed (step S759). The payout control microcomputer 660 performs control for lighting the prize ball LED 10 when the prize ball is being paid out in the display control process. When the prize ball payout is completed, control for turning off the prize ball LED 10 is performed.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. The contents of the output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, and output port 2 buffer are output to the output port (step S760: output processing). However, since the lower 4 bits (fire motors φ1 to φ4) of output port 0 are executed in step S750, the output process does not output the lower 4 bits of output port 0. The output port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer are a payout motor control process (step S753), a prepaid card control process (step S754), a main control communication process (step S755), and an information output process (step S758). And updated in the display control process (step S759). Note that the processing in steps S701 to S760 corresponds to payout control processing for controlling the payout means.

  54 and 55 are flowcharts illustrating an example of the power-off process in step S749. In the power-off process, the payout control microcomputer 660 first checks whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not it is in an on state) (step S901). If not in the ON state, the value of the backup monitoring timer formed in the RAM provided in the payout control board 98 is cleared to 0 (step S902). If it is on, the value of the backup monitoring timer formed in the RAM is incremented by 1 (step S903). If the value of the backup monitoring timer matches the determination value (for example, 2) (step S904), the power supply stop process after step S905 is executed. That is, the process shifts from a state in which the payout control is executed to a state in which a power supply stop process (power-off control process) for saving the control state of the payout control is executed.

  By using the backup monitoring timer and the determination value, if the power-off signal is kept on for a time corresponding to the determination value, the power supply stop process is started. That is, even if the power-off signal is turned on for a moment due to noise or the like, the power supply stop process is not erroneously started. Note that the value of the backup monitoring timer is stored by the backup power source for a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. Therefore, in step S709 in the main process, it can be confirmed that the process result of the power supply stop process is stored because the value of the backup monitoring timer is the same as the determination value.

  In the power supply stop process, the payout control microcomputer 660 sets the power supply stop process standby time in the standby time timer (step S905), and receives a prize ball control signal from the game control means for a predetermined period (power supply stop). Waiting time waiting time) During the waiting time to be received, a prize ball receiving process is performed (steps S906 to S909). The standby time timer is stored in the RAM.

  The processing standby time at the time of power supply stop is a predetermined time as a period from the output of the power-off signal to the start of the power-supply stop processing at the main board 120 according to the input of the power-off signal. is there. The power supply stop process standby time is determined at least so that the power supply stop process on the main board 120 is started before the award ball acceptance process during the standby time is completed.

  In the award ball accepting process during the waiting time, the payout control microcomputer 660 adds the number indicated by the prize ball control signal to the award ball unpaid number counter if the prize ball REQ signal is on (step S906) ( Step S909). If the prize ball REQ signal is not on, the payout control microcomputer 660 subtracts 1 from the waiting time timer (step S907), and if the waiting time timer is not 0, the processing returns to step S906 (step S908). That is, the award ball acceptance process during the standby time is executed until the power supply stop process standby time elapses. If the waiting time timer is 0, the award ball acceptance process during the waiting time is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S911.

  Here, an example of a conventional gaming machine will be described. Among conventional gaming machines in which a power-off signal is input to the game control board and the payout control board, a power-off signal is input to the game control board and the payout control board at the same timing. And the power-off signal is input to the game control board and the payout control board at different timings. Then, in the former gaming machine in which the power-off signal is input to the game control board and the payout control board at the same timing, when the power-off signal is input, the power supply stop processing is performed on the game control side and the payout control side. Since the processes are executed at the same timing, no command is transmitted / received between the game control board and the payout control board after the start of processing when the power supply is stopped.

  However, in the latter gaming machine in which the power-off signal is input to the game control board and the payout control board at different timings, the power supply stop process is executed at different timings on the game control side and the payout control side, Even after the start of processing when power supply is stopped, there is a possibility that a command may be transmitted and received between the game control board and the payout control board. It was. In particular, when the power supply stop process is executed on the payout control side prior to the game control side, a winning entry to the winning opening etc. is made after the power supply stop process is started on the payout control side. When the payout condition is satisfied, a prize ball REQ signal or the like output from the game control side may be missed, and there may be a problem that a prize ball due to winning is not paid out accurately.

  In order to avoid the possibility of such inconvenience as much as possible, in this embodiment, as described above, even after it is determined in step S905 that the power-off signal has been turned on, in step S908. If the waiting time timer is not 0, the award ball REQ signal is turned on, and if YES is determined in step S906, the number indicated by the award ball control signal is surely added to the award ball unpaid number counter in step S909. Even when the power-off signal is input to the payout control board, the payout of the winning ball based on the winning that occurred immediately before the power supply is stopped (during the standby time) can be reliably performed. It is configured.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 54, when the award ball acceptance process during the waiting time is completed, the payout control microcomputer 660 creates parity data (steps S911 to S920). That is, first, the clear data (00) is set in the checksum data area (step S911), and the checksum calculation start address corresponding to the start address of the RAM area where the contents should be stored even when the power supply is stopped is set in the pointer. (Step S912). Further, the number of checksum calculations corresponding to the final address of the RAM area where the contents are to be stored even when the power supply is stopped is set (step S913).

  Next, an exclusive OR of the contents of the checksum data area and the contents of the RAM area pointed to by the pointer is calculated (step S914). The calculation result is stored in the checksum data area (step S915), the pointer value is incremented by 1 (step S916), and the value of the checksum calculation count is decremented by 1 (step S917). Then, the processes in steps S914 to S917 are repeated until the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0 (step S918).

  When the value of the checksum calculation count becomes 0, the payout control microcomputer 660 inverts the value of each bit of the contents of the checksum data area (step S919). Then, the inverted data is stored in the checksum data area (step S920). This data becomes parity data to be checked when the power is turned on. Next, an access prohibition value is set in the RAM access register (step S921). Thereafter, the built-in RAM 111 cannot be accessed.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 660 sets the head address of the port clear setting table stored in the ROM 100 as a pointer (step S922). In the port clear setting table, the number of processes (the number of output ports to be cleared) is set to the head address, and then the output port address and output value data (clear data: the value of the off state of each bit of the output port) However, the number of output ports corresponding to the number of processes is sequentially set.

  The payout control microcomputer 660 loads data at the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, the number of processes) (step S923). Further, the value of the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S924), and the data of the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, the output port address) is loaded (step S925). Further, the value of the pointer is incremented by 1 (step S926), and the data of the address pointed to by the pointer (that is, output value data) is loaded (step S927). Then, the output value data is output to the output port (step S928). Thereafter, the number of processes is reduced by 1 (step S929), and if the number of processes is not 0, the process returns to step S924 (step S930). If the number of processes is 0 (Y in step S930), that is, if all output ports to be cleared are cleared, the timer interrupt is stopped (step S931) and the loop process is started.

  In the loop processing, it is monitored whether or not the power-off signal is turned off (step S932). When the power-off signal is turned off, the execution address at power-on (the address in step S701) is set as the return address, the return instruction is executed (step S934), and the timer interrupt process is terminated by RETI. Then, the process returns to the main process. Specifically, it returns to the state of controlling a gaming device (such as a ball payout device 154) provided in the gaming machine.

  In the loop processing, it is monitored whether or not the reset signal is in a low level on state (step S935). When the reset signal is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 660 enters a system reset state (system reset). That is, the payout control microcomputer 660 is returned to the operation stop state which is the start state (step S937). In this example, the payout control microcomputer 660 turns on the reset signal so as to be actively stopped when a voltage higher than the drive voltage (for example, 4 V) is still supplied. The voltage level of the detection voltage is set.

  When the power supply is stopped by the above process, the award ball acceptance process during the standby time and the power supply stop process in steps S911 to S931 are executed, indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed. Data (specified value with backup and checksum) is stored in the backup RAM, RAM access is disabled, the output port is cleared, and a timer interrupt for executing control processing such as the payout device after step S749 Is set to the prohibited state.

  By executing the award ball accepting process during the waiting time, even when the game control microcomputer 99 transmits a prize ball control signal as the number-of-payout data immediately before the power supply is stopped, the payout control microcomputer 660 is surely paid out. The numerical data can be received and stored, and the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

  In order to ensure that the payout control microcomputer 660 can receive the prize ball control signal, the payout control microcomputer 660 supplies power by delaying the timing at which the power-off signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 660. You may make it the structure which delays the timing which starts a process at the time of a stop. However, in such a configuration, it is necessary to provide a hardware delay circuit or the like. If a hardware delay circuit or the like is not provided, the game control microcomputer 99 may start outputting a prize ball control signal immediately before the power-off signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 660, or payout control. After the power-off signal is input to the microcomputer 660 (when transmission of the power-off signal to the game control microcomputer 99 is delayed), the game control microcomputer 99 starts outputting the prize ball control signal There is a risk. In this case, if the payout control microcomputer 660 immediately starts the power supply stop process in response to the power-off signal, the payout control microcomputer 660 may not recognize that the prize ball control signal has been transmitted. . However, in this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 660 can reliably capture the prize ball control signal by executing the prize ball acceptance process during the waiting time.

  In this embodiment, the entire RAM area of the payout control board 98 is backed up by a backup power source (the contents of the RAM are saved for a predetermined period even if power supply to the gaming machine is stopped). Yes. Therefore, by the processing in steps S905 to S931, the checksum based on the contents of the RAM when the power-off signal is output is also stored in the RAM together with the value of the backup monitoring timer. When the power supply is restored within a predetermined period after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the payout control means performs the data stored in the RAM (the payout immediately before the power supply is stopped) by the process of step S711 described above. The payout state can be returned to the state immediately before the power supply is stopped according to the data indicating the payout state which is the control state by the control means (for example, including the value of the award ball non-payout number counter). If the power supply stop period exceeds the predetermined period, the value of the backup monitoring timer and the checksum should be different from the regular values. In this case, the initialization process in step S712 is executed.

  As described above, the data for returning the payout control state to the state immediately before the power supply is stopped by the power supply stop process (preparation process for power supply stop) is surely performed. In the example, the payout control board 98 is stored in the entire RAM area). Therefore, even if the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, if the power is restored within a predetermined period, the payout control state can be returned to the state immediately before the power supply is stopped. It should be noted that the entire RAM area of the payout control board 98 is not backed up by power, but only the area for storing data for returning the payout control state to the state immediately before the power supply is stopped is backed up by power. May be.

  If the power-off signal is turned off, the process returns to step S701. In this case, since data indicating that the power supply stop process has been executed is set, the payout control side recovery process in step S711 is executed. Therefore, when the power-off signal from the voltage drop monitoring unit is turned off after executing the power supply stop process, the process returns to the state of executing the step 701 of the main process. Therefore, even if a power interruption or the like occurs, the payout control process does not stop, and the payout control process is automatically continued.

  When the power supply voltage is further lowered and the VCC monitored by the power supply monitoring circuit 920 becomes +4.5 V or less after the power supply stop processing in the payout control microcomputer 660 and the game control microcomputer 99 is completed, The reset signal is set to the low level, and the low level reset signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 660 and the game control microcomputer 99, respectively, and the operation is stopped.

  FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the firing motor control process in step S752. In the firing motor control process, the payout control CPU 659 executes the following processes when the error bit in the error flag (main control unconnected error bit, prize ball REQ signal error bit or activation error bit) is on. The process is terminated without doing so (step S510). In step S510, if any one of the three bits in the error flag is set, it is determined that the error bit is set. If no error bit is set, the VL signal from the card unit device 731 is in an off state (no prepaid card is connected), or the full tank switch 158 is in an on state (bottom plate full). ), The process proceeds to step S518 (steps S511, S513). If the prepaid card is not connected and the lower pan is not full, the process proceeds to step S514. In step S514, the payout control CPU 659 checks whether or not the touch sensor signal (launch control signal) from the touch ring 110 is on. If it is in the on state, the process proceeds to step S515, and if it is not in the on state, the process proceeds to step S518.

  In step S515, the payout control CPU 659 increments the firing motor excitation pattern counter by one. Then, data corresponding to the value of the excitation pattern counter is read from the firing motor excitation pattern table stored in the ROM (step S516). Further, the read data is set in the firing motor excitation pattern buffer (step S517). As described above, the contents of the firing motor excitation pattern buffer are output to the output port in step S760. In the firing motor excitation pattern table, the excitation pattern data (shooting motors φ1 to φ4) for each step for rotating the firing motor 601 is sequentially set.

  In step S518, non-rotation data (excitation pattern for preventing the firing motor 601 from rotating) is set in the firing motor excitation pattern buffer.

  As described above, since the firing motor 601 is disabled when the prepaid card is not connected or when the lower tray is full, the game does not proceed even though they are generated. . Furthermore, when a communication error due to a main board unconnected error (connection confirmation signal OFF state) or a prize ball REQ signal error occurs when the prize ball REQ signal is turned on or off at an improper timing, and a payout start from the game control means Even when the command is not received, the launch motor 601 is disabled so that the game ball cannot be launched into the game area 7.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the payout motor control process in step S753. In the payout motor control process, the payout control microcomputer 660 executes any one of steps S521 to S526 according to the value of the payout motor control code.

  In the payout motor normal process (step S521) executed when the value of the payout motor control code is 0, the payout control microcomputer 660 sets the pointer at the head address of the table stored in the ROM. The payout motor normal processing setting table stores a payout motor excitation pattern table in which data of excitation patterns (payout motors φ1 to φ4) of each step for rotating the payout motor 115 at the time of ball payout is sequentially set. Yes.

  In the payout motor activation preparation process (step S522) executed when the value of the payout motor control code is 1, the payout control microcomputer 660 uses bits 4 to 4 of the output port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 0. For example, the initial value of the excitation pattern is set to 7.

  In the payout motor slow-up process (step S523) executed when the value of the payout motor control code is 2, the payout control microcomputer 660 performs a constant speed process in order to smoothly start the payout motor 115. The output port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 0 by reading the contents of the payout motor excitation pattern table at a time interval longer than the time interval and gradually approaching the time interval in the case of constant speed processing. Set to bits 4-7. At the time of reading, the contents of the payout motor excitation pattern table at the address pointed to by the pointer are read and the value of the pointer is incremented by one.

  In the payout motor constant speed process (step S524) executed when the value of the payout motor control code is 3, the payout control microcomputer 660 periodically reads the contents of the payout motor excitation pattern table and sets the output port 0. Set to bits 4-7 of the output port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state.

  In the payout motor brake process (step S525) executed when the value of the payout motor control code is 4, the payout control microcomputer 660 is more effective than the constant speed process in order to stop the payout motor 115 smoothly. Bit 4 of the output port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 0 by reading the content of the payout motor excitation pattern table at a long interval and gradually away from the time interval in the case of constant speed processing. Set to ~ 7.

  In the ball biting payout motor brake process (step S526) executed when the value of the payout motor control code is 5, the payout control microcomputer 660 performs the payout motor 115 in the case of rotation for releasing the ball biting. In order to smoothly stop the payout motor, the payout motor is longer than the rotation of the payout motor 115 for releasing the ball biting and at a time interval gradually moving away from the time interval in the case of constant speed processing. The contents of the excitation pattern table are read and set in bits 4 to 7 of the output port 0 buffer corresponding to the output state of output port 0.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the main control communication process of step S755. In the main control communication process, the payout control microcomputer 660 executes any one of steps S531 to S532 according to the value of the main control communication control code. If the value of the main control communication control code is 0 (waiting for reception of a prize ball control signal), the process ends without moving to step S531 or S532.

  FIG. 59 is activated in response to the award ball REQ signal from the main board 120 introduced to the interrupt terminal being turned on (low level) when the control process of the payout device or the like is being executed. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball REQ interruption process. This prize ball REQ interrupt process is included in the payout device control process. In the prize ball REQ interrupt process, when the error bit is turned on, the payout control CPU 659 ends the process without executing the subsequent processes (step S541).

  If the BRDY signal is on, the payout control CPU 659 ends the process without executing the subsequent processes (step S542). That the BRDY signal is in an ON state means that a ball lending request is generated from the card unit device 731 or that a ball lending process is in progress. That is, when a ball lending request is generated or a ball lending process is in progress, communication with the game control means of the main board 120 (communication relating to prize ball payout) does not proceed. That is, even if the prize ball REQ signal is turned on, the prize ball BUSY signal is not turned on.

  When the conditions of steps S541 to S542 are not satisfied and the connection confirmation signal is on (YES in the process of step S543), the payout control CPU 659 inputs a prize ball control signal via the input port 0. (Step S545a), the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball control signal is added to the contents of the prize ball unpaid number counter (Step S545b), and a process for turning on the prize ball BUSY signal is performed (Step S546). Specifically, the bit corresponding to the prize ball BUSY signal in the output port 1 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 1 is set to the on state. Then, a prize ball BUSY signal output time (10 in this example) is set in the main control communication control timer (step S547), the value of the main control communication control code is set to 1 (step S548), and the process is terminated. The main control communication control timer is a timer used for monitoring time related to communication with the game control means of the main board 120. At this stage, the main control communication control timer is used to set a timing for turning off the award ball BUSY signal. The sphere BUSY signal output time is set. The prize ball unpaid-out number counter is formed in a non-volatile (power-backed up in this example) RAM area. Further, in this embodiment, when the prize ball REQ signal is transmitted (turned on), the prize ball number indicated by the prize ball control signal is added to the contents of the prize ball unpaid number counter, Although the prize ball BUSY signal is transmitted (turns on), the execution order of the addition process for the prize ball unpaid-out number counter and the process of sending the prize ball BUSY signal may be reversed. As described above, the prize ball control signal transmitted from the main board 120 is received by the interrupt process.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing main control communication in-progress processing (step S531) executed when the value of the main control communication control code is 1. In the main control communication process, the payout control CPU 659 confirms the state of the prize ball REQ signal (step S552) if the connection confirmation signal is on (step S551). If the prize ball REQ signal is off, the prize ball REQ signal error bit in the error flag is set (step S553).

  Next, the payout control CPU 659 confirms the value of the main control communication control timer (step S554), and if not 0, subtracts 1 from the value of the main control communication control timer (step S555) and ends the process. If the value of the main control communication control timer is 0, processing for turning off the prize ball BUSY signal is performed. Specifically, the bit corresponding to the prize ball BUSY signal in the output port 1 buffer corresponding to the output state of the output port 1 is set to the off state (step S556). Also, a prize ball REQ signal OFF monitoring time (for example, 24) is set in the main control communication control timer (step S557). Then, the value of the main control communication control code is set to 2 (step S558), and the process ends.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a main control communication end process (step S532) executed when the value of the main control communication control code is 2. In the main control communication process, if the error bit (main control unconnected error bit, prize ball REQ signal error bit or activation error bit) is on, the payout control CPU 659 proceeds to step S567 (step S567). S561). Moreover, also when a connection confirmation signal is an OFF state, it transfers to step S567 (step S562). When both error bits are in the off state and the connection confirmation signal is in the on state, it is confirmed whether or not the prize ball REQ signal is in the off state (step S563). When it is turned off, the process proceeds to step S567.

  If the prize ball REQ signal is not turned off, the value of the main control communication control timer is confirmed (step S564). If the value of the main control communication control timer is not 0, the value of the main control communication control timer is decremented by 1 (step S565). If the value of the main control communication control timer is 0, the prize ball REQ signal is not turned off within the monitoring time, and the prize ball REQ signal error bit is set in the error flag (step S566), and the process goes to step S567. Transition. In step S567, the value of the main control communication control code is set to 0, and the process ends.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the winning ball lending control process in step S756. In the winning ball lending control process, the payout control microcomputer 660 confirms that the detection signal of the payout number count switch 116 is turned on (step S601). The counter value is decremented by 1 (steps S602 and S604), and if the ball is not being lent, the value of the prize ball unpaid-out number counter is decremented by 1 (steps S602 and S603). Next, the payout ball detection bit of the payout control state flag formed in the RAM is set (step S605). The payout ball detection bit is a game in spite of driving the payout motor 115 in one award ball payout process (up to 15 balls) or one ball lending process (25 payouts) in the payout passing waiting process. This is used to detect that no sphere has passed through the payout number counting switch 116. Thereafter, any one of steps S610 to S612 is executed according to the value of the payout control code.

  In the winning ball lending control process, when checking the detection signal of the payout number count switch 116 or subtracting the unpaid number counter, the error bit check is not executed. Therefore, even if an error state relating to the payout of game balls is detected, every time a payout of game balls is detected by the payout number count switch 116, if the payout game balls are loaned balls, the ball lending unpaid number counter The value is subtracted by 1, and if it is a prize ball, a process of subtracting 1 from the prize ball unpaid-out number counter is executed. Therefore, even if an error relating to payout occurs, the number of unpaid game balls can be managed accurately. That is, the game balls paid out from the ball payout device 154 before the payout control microcomputer 660 detects the occurrence of an error are detected by the payout number count switch 116 with a slight delay from the time of payout. The payout control microcomputer 660 generates an error when the occurrence of an error is detected after the game ball is paid out from the ball payout device 154 and before the game ball is detected by the payout number count switch 116. The game balls paid out from the ball paying-out device 154 before detecting can be reflected in the award ball unpaid number counter or the ball lending unpaid number counter.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the payout start waiting process (step S610) executed when the payout control code is 0. In the payout start waiting process, the payout control microcomputer 660 does not execute the subsequent processes if the error bit is set (step S621). The fact that the error bit is not set means that the game control means can control the progress of the game, and hence the award ball payout control according to the progress of the game can be executed. On the other hand, the fact that the error bit is set means that the game control means is in a state in which the progress of the game is impossible, so that the payout control of the prize ball according to the progress of the game cannot be executed. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 660 stops the payout control of the winning ball when the error bit is set.

  On the other hand, if the BRDY signal is not in the on state, processing for paying out a prize ball after step S631 is executed. If the BRDY signal is on and the BRQ signal that is a ball lending request signal is on, a ball lending operation flag is set (steps S623 and S624). Then, “25” is set in the unpaid ball lending number counter (step S625), and “25” is set in the payout motor rotation number buffer (step S626).

  The payout motor rotation frequency buffer is referred to in the payout motor control process (step S753). That is, in the payout motor control process, control is performed to rotate the payout motor 115 by the number of rotations corresponding to the value set in the payout motor rotation frequency buffer.

  Thereafter, the payout control microcomputer 660 sets a value corresponding to the payout motor start preparation process (step S522) (specifically, “1”) to the payout motor control code for selecting the process executed in the payout motor control process. ) Is set (step S627), the value of the payout control code is set to 1 (step S628), and the process is terminated.

  In step S631, the payout control microcomputer 660 checks whether or not the value of the award ball unpaid number counter is 0 (step S631). If 0, the process ends. The prize ball unpaid-out counter is a value other than 0 (the number indicated by the prize ball control signal) when the prize ball REQ signal is received from the game control means of the main board 120 in step S546 in the main control communication normal process. ) Is added. If the value of the award ball unpaid number counter is not 0, it is confirmed whether it is 15 or more (step S632). If it is less than 15, the value of the award ball unpaid number counter is set in the payout motor rotation count buffer (step S633), and if it is 15 or more, “15” is set in the payout motor rotation count buffer. Then, a winning ball operating flag is set (step S635), and the process proceeds to step S627.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing a payout motor stop waiting process (step S611) executed when the payout control code is 1. In the payout motor stop waiting process, the payout control microcomputer 660 checks whether or not the payout operation is completed (step S641). The payout control microcomputer 660 sets a flag to that effect when, for example, the payout motor brake process (step S525) in the payout motor control process ends, and the payout operation ends when the flag is confirmed in step S641. It can be confirmed whether or not.

  When the payout operation is completed, the payout control microcomputer 660 sets the payout passing monitoring time in the payout control monitoring timer (step S642). The payout passing monitoring time is a time that has a margin in the time from when the last payout ball is paid out by the payout motor 115 until it passes through the payout number count switch 116. Then, the value of the payout control code is set to 2 (step S643), and the process ends.

  65 to 67 are flowcharts showing a payout passing waiting process (step S612) executed when the value of the payout control code is 2. In the payout passing waiting process, when a prize ball is being paid out, it is determined that the payout has been completed normally if the value of the prize ball unpaid number counter is zero. If the value of the award ball unpaid-out counter is not 0, if it is not in an error state, a re-payout operation of one game ball is tried up to 2 times. If it is detected in the re-payout operation that the game ball is actually paid out by the payout number count switch 116, it is determined that the payout has been completed normally. In this embodiment, the maximum number of game balls to be paid out in one prize ball payout operation is 15, and when a prize ball control signal is received during the prize ball payout, Since the value increases, even if the payout is completed normally, the value of the award ball non-payout number counter may not be 0.

  Further, when the ball lending is being paid out, it is determined that the payout has been completed normally if the value of the ball lending unpaid-out counter is 0. If the value of the ball lending unpaid number counter is not 0, and if it is not in an error state, a re-payout operation of one game ball or the remaining number of ball lending (corresponding to the value of the ball lending unpaid number counter) Try. In this embodiment, the number of game balls to be paid out in one ball lending and payout operation is 25 (fixed value), and the payout motor 115 is rotated so that 25 game balls are paid out. Therefore, if the value of the unpaid ball lending counter is not 0, the payout has not been completed normally.

  In the payout waiting process, the payout control microcomputer 660 first checks the value of the payout control timer, and if the value is 0, the process proceeds to step S653 (step S650). If the value of the payout control timer is not 0, the value of the payout control timer is decremented by 1 (step S651). If the value of the payout control timer is not 0 (step S652), that is, if the payout control timer has not timed out, the process is terminated. Note that the process of step S650 is a process that takes into account when a game ball payout retry operation to be described later is started. When the process of step S807, which will be described later, is executed, a retry operation is started via a route that moves from step S650 to S653.

  If the payout control timer has timed out (step S652), it is confirmed whether or not the ball lending payout process (ball lending operation) has been executed (step S653). Whether or not the ball lending operation has been executed is confirmed by whether or not the ball lending operation in progress flag in the payout control state flag formed in the RAM is set. When the ball lending operation is not executed, that is, when the prize ball payout process (prize ball operation) is executed, the payout control microcomputer 660 checks the value of the award ball unpaid number counter ( Step S654). When the value of the winning ball unpaid-out counter is 0, it is determined that the winning ball payout process has been completed normally, and the payout ball detection bit in the payout control state flag, 1 bit during re-payout operation, and during re-payout operation 2 bits, the winning ball operating flag and the ball lending operating bit are reset (step S655), the payout control code is set to 0 (step S656), and the process is terminated. This bit is set when the switch 116 is turned on, and indicates that the payout number counting switch 116 has detected at least one game ball during the payout operation. Further, 1 bit during the re-payout operation and 2 bits during the re-payout operation are control bits used when executing a re-payout process including two re-payout operations.

  When the value of the award ball unpaid number counter is not 0, the payout control microcomputer 660 sets an error flag (specifically, 1 bit for the payout switch abnormality detection error, 2 bits for the payout switch abnormality detection error, and Any one or more of the payout case error bits) is not set (step S659), and the payout ball detection bit is not set (step S661). A payout operation is executed. If the error flag is set, the re-payout operation is not executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even when the payout is normally completed, the value of the award ball non-payout number counter may not be 0. Therefore, if the payout ball detection bit is set, that is, if the payout number count switch 116 detects the payout of at least one game ball during the prize ball payout process, it is assumed that the prize ball payout process is normally completed. The process proceeds to step S655. In addition, for example, when 15 game balls should be paid out in one prize ball payout process, when only 14 game balls are actually paid out (the payout number count switch 116 has only 14 game balls). (If not detected), since the payout ball detection bit is set, it is considered that the winning ball payout processing is normally completed. The shortage will be paid out in the next prize ball payout process, so there will be no disadvantage to the player.

  In order to execute the re-payout process, the pay-out control microcomputer 660 first checks whether or not 2 bits during re-payout operation are set (step S662). If not set, it is confirmed whether or not 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation (step S663). If 1 bit is not set during the re-payout operation, 1 is set as the number of re-payout operations to execute the first re-payout operation (step S664), and 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation (step S665). ) The value of the re-payout operation number or the ball lending unpaid-out number counter is set in the payout motor rotation number buffer (step S666). The payout motor rotation frequency buffer is referred to in the payout motor control process (step S753). That is, in the payout motor control process, control is performed to rotate the payout motor 115 by the number of rotations corresponding to the value set in the payout motor rotation frequency buffer. In step S666, the value of the unpaid ball lending number counter is also handled because step S666 is used in the re-payout process in the lend-out process. That is, in step S666, the payout control microcomputer 660 sets the re-payout operation number in the re-payout process in the winning ball payout process, and sets the value of the unpaid-in-ball-out number counter in the repayment process in the ball lending payout process. set. Thereafter, the payout control code is set to 1 (step S667), and the process is terminated.

  If it is confirmed in step S663 that 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation, the payout control microcomputer 660 sets 1 as the re-payout operation number in order to execute the second re-payout (step S663). In step S668, 1 bit is reset during the re-payout operation (step S669), and 2 bits are set during the re-payout operation (step S670). Then, control goes to a step S666.

  In step S662, when it is confirmed that 2 bits are set during the re-payout operation, the payout control microcomputer 660 does not pay out the game ball even if the re-payout process is executed twice (payout number count). Assuming that the switch 116 has not detected a game ball), the payout case error bit in the error flag is set (step S672). At that time, 2 bits are reset during the re-payout operation (step S671). Then, the process ends.

  As described above, if no game balls are paid out even if two re-payout operations are performed in the re-payout process (corrected payout process), it is determined that the game ball payout operation has failed and the payout number count switch has not passed. An error bit (payout case error bit) is set.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the prize game medium payout control means in the payout control microcomputer 660 does not pay out the prize game medium based on the detection signal from the payout number count switch 116 as the payout detection means. When this is detected, control is performed so that the payout means pays out one prize game medium up to a predetermined number of times (in this example, twice). In this embodiment, if the prize game medium is not paid out even if the retry operation for paying out the prize game medium is performed twice, the payout case error bit is set and an error is being generated. (Step S672), the payout case error bit may be set when it is first detected that the premium game medium has not been paid out. Note that “retry operation (or“ retry ”,“ retry operation processing ”)” means that the actual payout number is the same as the normal payout process for executing payout of a predetermined number of game balls. This is an operation to be executed when the number is small, and means an operation for executing the payout process again in order to pay out an unpaid game ball separately from the normal payout process.

  In the prize ball lending control process, the error bit is checked to determine whether or not to perform a payout operation (one prize ball payout or one ball lending). The payout start shown in FIG. Only in the waiting process. In the payout motor stop waiting process shown in FIG. 64 and the payout passing wait process shown in FIG. 65 and the like, the error bit is not checked. Note that the error bit is also checked in step S659 or the like in the payout passing waiting process, but this check is for determining whether or not a re-payout operation is to be performed, and the payout operation (single prize ball payout or 1 This is not to determine whether or not to start the lending of the ball. Therefore, after the process of step S626, S633 or step S634 is performed and the game ball payout process is started, the payout process is not interrupted even if an error occurs. In other words, when an error occurs, the game ball payout process is continued until a point at which the game ball can be cut well (at the time when one prize ball payout or one ball lending ends). The error bit in the error flag checked in step S621 includes an error bit indicating that the connection confirmation signal from the main board 120 has been turned off. Therefore, even when the connection confirmation signal is turned off, the game ball payout process is stopped at a time when it is best to turn it off.

  When it is confirmed in step S653 that the ball lending / dispensing process (ball lending operation) has been executed, the payout control microcomputer 660 confirms whether or not the value of the lending unpaid-out number counter is 0 (step S653). S657). If it is 0, it is determined that the ball lending / dispensing process is normally completed, and the process proceeds to step S655.

  If it is determined in step S657 that the value of the unpaid ball lending counter is not 0, an error flag (specifically, 1 bit of a payout switch abnormality detection error, 2 bits of a payout switch abnormality detection error, and a payout case error bit) On the condition that any one or a plurality of bits) is not set (step S675), the re-payout process is executed. If the error flag is set, the re-payout process is not executed.

  In order to execute the re-payout process, the pay-out control microcomputer 660 first checks whether or not 2 bits during re-payout operation are set (step S676). If not set, it is confirmed whether or not 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation (step S677). If 1 bit is not set during re-payout operation, 1 is set as the number of re-payout operations to execute the first re-payout operation (step S678), and 1 bit is set during re-payout operation (step S679). ) After further resetting the payout ball detection bit (step S680), the process proceeds to step S666.

  In step S677, when it is confirmed that 1 bit is set during the re-payout operation, the payout control microcomputer 660 performs a process for executing the re-payout operation again. Specifically, 1 bit is reset during the re-payout operation (step S681). If the payout ball detection bit is set, that is, if the game ball is paid out in the first re-payout operation, the process proceeds to step S683. If the payout ball detection bit is not set, the process proceeds to step S684 to execute the second re-payout operation.

  In step S683, the payout ball detection bit is reset, and then the process proceeds to step S666. Therefore, in this case, since 1 bit remains set during the re-payout operation, the first (first) re-payout operation is performed again. In step S684, 1 is set as the number of re-payout operations (step S684), 2 bits during re-payout operation are set (step S685), and the process proceeds to step S666.

  In step S676, when it is confirmed that 2 bits during the re-payout operation are set, the payout control microcomputer 660 resets 2 bits during the re-payout operation (step S686) and the payout ball detection bit is set. In other words, if the game ball has been paid out by the re-payout operation, the process proceeds to step S683 to try to eliminate the remaining unpaid. If the payout ball detection bit is not set, it is determined that the game ball has not been paid out even if the re-payout process is executed twice (the payout count switch 116 has not detected a game ball), and the payout in the error flag A case error bit is set (step S688). Then, the process ends.

  As described above, if one game ball is not paid out even if two re-payout operations are continuously performed in the re-payout process (corrected payout process) related to the ball lending process, the game ball payout operation is poor. As a result, a payout count switch non-passing error bit (payout case error bit) is set.

  FIG. 68 is a timing chart for explaining the ball biting detection process executed in the payout motor control process (step S768). In the payout motor constant speed process (step S524) in the payout motor control process, the payout control microcomputer 660 monitors a detection signal from the payout sensor board 114. The detection signal from the payout sensor board 114 is turned on when, for example, six detection protrusions 79b projecting from one side surface of the gear 79 rotating in conjunction with the payout motor 115 are crossed (see FIG. 7). ). Therefore, the detection signal from the payout sensor substrate 114 is output six times each time the gear 79 rotates once.

  Therefore, for example, the dispensing control microcomputer 660 turns on the detection signal from the dispensing sensor board 114 even though the excitation motor 115 is provided with an excitation pattern having the number of steps that causes the gear 79 to rotate 1/6 or more times. If the state does not occur, the gear 79 and the payout motor 115 are actually caused by foreign matter such as dust adhering to the ball payout member 74 or the like and the game ball becoming clogged (ball biting has occurred). Can be determined not to rotate.

  In this embodiment, the payout motor 115 rotates once when it receives an excitation pattern for 16 steps (2.087 ms per step). When the payout motor 115 rotates once, the gear 79 rotates 1/6 and pays out one game ball. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 73, the payout control microcomputer 660 detects from the payout sensor substrate 114 every time the payout motor 115 is given an excitation pattern for 16 steps. The signal is checked to determine whether or not the payout motor 115 is rotating. Then, if it is in the same state for five consecutive times (the detection signal from the dispensing sensor substrate 114 is the OFF state for five consecutive times, or the ON state is continuous for five times) A ball biting release process is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the payout control microcomputer 660 repeats the process of rotating the payout motor 115 at a high speed and the process of rotating at a low speed a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times). Then, each time an excitation pattern for 16 steps is given to the payout motor 115, it is checked whether or not a detection signal is output from the payout sensor substrate 114, and it is determined whether or not the payout motor 115 is rotating. If it is determined by the detection signal that the rotation of the payout motor 115 has been restored, the ball biting release processing is terminated and the normal ball payout processing is returned to.

  If a detection signal is not output from the payout sensor board 114 even if the high speed rotation process and the low speed rotation process are executed a predetermined number of times, a ball biting error bit (payout case error bit) is set in the error flag. When the payout case error bit is set, the payout control microcomputer 660 does not drive the payout motor 115. When the payout case error bit is reset (see step S807 in FIG. 71), the payout control microcomputer 660 returns to a state in which the payout motor 115 can be driven.

  Thus, the payout control means includes a drive state monitoring means for monitoring the operating state of the payout means, and a drive stop means for stopping the driving of the payout means when the drive state monitoring means detects a malfunction of the payout means. Including.

  Next, error processing will be described. FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the type of error when the error bit is set and the display of the LED 664 for error display. As shown in FIG. 70, when the connection confirmation signal from the main board 120 is turned off, the payout control microcomputer 660 displays “1” on the error display LED 664 as a main board non-connection error. Control to do. Therefore, if the prize ball BUSY signal is turned off during confirmation of the input state of the prize ball BUSY signal, “1” is displayed on the error display LED 664.

  When disconnection of the payout number count switch 116 or ball clogging occurs at the payout number count switch 116, the error display LED 664 is controlled to display “2” as the payout switch abnormality detection error 1. The disconnection of the payout number count switch 116 or the occurrence of clogging in the payout number count switch 116 is determined by the detection signal of the payout number count switch 116 not being turned off.

  When the detection signal of the payout number count switch 116 is turned on even though the game ball is not paying out, control is performed to display “3” on the error display LED 664 as a payout switch abnormality detection error 2. Do. If the detection signal of the payout count switch 116 does not turn on despite the rotation abnormality of the payout motor 115 or the game ball being paid out, “4” is displayed on the error display LED 664 as a payout case error. Take control. The specific method for detecting that the detection signal of the payout number count switch 116 is not turned on is as described above. When the prize ball REQ signal is turned on at an improper timing, or when the prize ball REQ signal is turned off at an improper timing, “5” is displayed in the error display LED 664 as a prize ball REQ signal error. Control to display. A specific method for detecting that the prize ball REQ signal is turned on or off at an incorrect timing is as described above.

  In addition, when the lower pan is full, that is, when the full switch 158 is turned on, control is performed to display “6” on the error display LED 664 as a full error. When the supply ball is insufficient, that is, when the ball break switch 157 is turned on, control is performed to display “7” on the error display LED 664 as a ball break error.

  Further, when the VL signal from the card unit device 731 is turned off, control is performed to display “8” on the error display LED 664 as a prepaid card unit unconnected error. When communication is performed with the card unit device 731 at an incorrect timing, control is performed to display “9” on the error display LED 664 as a prepaid card unit communication error. The prepaid card unit communication error is detected in the prepaid card unit control process (step S754).

  Further, when the start error bit set due to not receiving the payout start command from the main board 120 at the start of power supply is set, the control for displaying “A” on the error display LED 664. To do.

  Among the above errors, after a payout switch abnormality detection error 2, a payout case error, a prize ball REQ signal error or a start-up error occurs, the error release switch 665 is operated and an operation signal is output from the error release switch 665 (ON When the state is reached, the payout control means returns to the state before the error occurred. As for the start error, even if an operation signal is output from the error release switch 665, it may be configured not to return to the state before the error occurred.

  71 and 72 are flowcharts showing the error processing in step S757. In the error processing, the payout control microcomputer 660 checks the error flag, and the set bits are only the payout switch abnormality detection error 2, the payout case error, the winning ball REQ signal error or the start error bit (4 It is checked whether only one of the two bits, only two of the four bits, only three of the four bits, or only four of them (step S801). If only those bits are set, it is confirmed whether or not the operation signal is turned on from the error release switch 665 (step S802). The payout control CPU 659 does not turn on the operation signal from the error release switch 665 even if the payout number count switch 116 detects the payout of the game ball in the error state in which the error bit of the payout case motor error is set. Unless it becomes a state, the error bit of the payout case motor error is not reset (see steps S803 to S807). That is, the error state is continued even if the payout detecting means detects payout of a prize game medium that has not been paid out. When the operation signal is turned on, the error recovery time is set in the pre-error recovery timer (step S803). The error recovery time is the time from when the error release switch 665 is operated until when the error is actually returned to the normal state.

  If the operation signal from the error release switch 665 is not on, the value of the timer before error recovery is confirmed (step S804). If the value of the timer before error recovery is 0, that is, if the timer before error recovery is not set, the process proceeds to step S808. If the pre-error recovery timer is set, the value of the pre-error recovery timer is decremented by -1 (step S805). If the pre-error recovery timer value becomes 0 (step S806), the payout switch of the error flag is set. The bits of the abnormality detection error 2, the payout case error and the prize ball REQ signal error are reset (step S807), and the process proceeds to step S808.

  When the processing of step S807 is executed, there may be an error bit that is not in the set state among the bits of the payout switch abnormality detection error 2, the payout case error, and the prize ball REQ signal error. There is no problem resetting error bits that are not in the state. As described above, in this embodiment, when an error (see FIG. 70) that causes the setting of the payout switch abnormality detection error 2, the payout case error, or the winning ball REQ signal error bit occurs, an error occurs. The error is released when the release switch 665 is pressed.

  When the process of step S807 is executed and the payout case error bit is reset, the payout control code is “2” (corresponding to the execution of the payout passing waiting process shown in FIGS. 65 to 67), and the prize ball When the value of the unpaid-out number counter or the value of the ball-lending unpaid-out number counter is not 0, a retry operation for game ball payout is started. That is, when the award ball lending control process of step S756 is executed next, when the payout passing waiting process of step S612 is executed, the repayment process is performed again. For example, if the prize ball payout process has been performed and the value of the prize ball unpaid number counter is not 0, the process proceeds from step S654 to step S659, and it is confirmed in step S659 that the error bit is in the reset state. Therefore, the process for starting the re-payout process after step S662 is executed again, and the re-payout process is executed. Regarding the payout case error bit reset by pressing the error release switch 665, when the bit is set (when step S672 is executed), the payout control timer has already expired. Therefore, when the process in step S807 is executed and the payout case error bit is reset, the payout control timer = 0 is determined in the determination in step S650 when the payout passage waiting process is executed next. Further, when the payout case error bit is set, the payout ball detection bit is 0 (since step S672 is not executed unless the payout ball detection bit is 0 according to the determination in step S661). Therefore, step S662 is always executed whenever it is confirmed in step S659 that the error bit is in the reset state. That is, the re-payout process is always executed.

  As described above, the payout control means is used for paying out a game ball when the payout number counting switch 116 detects no game ball even though the ball payout device 154 has paid out the game ball. After performing the correct payout control in which the ball payout device 154 executes the retry operation for a predetermined time (for example, twice) as a limit, the payout number count switch 116 detects that no game ball has been detected. When it is detected (see step S661 and thereafter in FIG. 66), the control state related to the payout is shifted to the error state, and the correction payout control is performed again on the condition that the error release signal is output from the error release switch 665 in the error state. The correction payout control restart process for executing

  Further, even during the re-payout process in the error state (specifically, during the re-payout process before setting the payout case error and during the re-payout process after the error release switch 665 is pressed), steps S601 to S601 shown in FIG. The process of S604 is being executed. That is, even when an error related to payout occurs, if the game ball passes the payout number count switch 116, the value of the award ball unpaid number counter or the ball lending unpaid number counter is subtracted. Therefore, the value of the award ball unpaid number counter or the ball lending unpaid number counter when returning from the error state is a value reflecting the number of game balls actually paid out. That is, even if an error relating to payout occurs, the number of game balls actually paid out can be accurately managed.

  Also, in the payout passing waiting process shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, even when it is confirmed that the game ball has been paid out as a result of the re-payout process, the payout case error bit is not reset. The bit of the payout case error is reset only when the error release switch 665 is operated (specifically, when an error return time after operation has elapsed) (steps S802 and S807). That is, the state of the payout case error (payout shortage error) is not automatically canceled based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the payout number count switch 116, etc., and the payout case must be processed without human operation. The error is not cleared. Therefore, the game store clerk and the like can surely recognize that a shortage of payout has occurred.

  When the error reset switch 665 is operated so as to be reset in hardware (reset to the payout control microcomputer 660), for example, a prize ball is acquired by operating the error cancel switch 665. The value of the unpaid number counter is also cleared. However, in this embodiment, since the payout control means is configured to perform the re-payout operation again by operating the error release switch 665, the payout process is executed reliably, which is disadvantageous to the player. Can not be given.

  In step S808, the payout control microcomputer 660 checks the detection signal of the full switch 158. If the detection signal of the full tank switch 158 is output (if it is in the ON state), the full tank error bit in the error flag is set (step S809). If the detection signal of the game control full tank switch 158 is OFF, the full error bit is reset (step S810).

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 660 checks the detection signal of the ball break switch 157 (step S811). If the detection signal of the ball break switch 157 is output (if it is on), the ball break error bit in the error flag is set (step S812). If the detection signal of the ball break switch 157 is off, the ball break error bit is reset (step S813). When the ball break error bit is set, the bit corresponding to the ball break LED 9 in the output port 1 buffer is set to a value corresponding to the lighting state in the display control processing in step S759.

  Furthermore, the payout control microcomputer 660 confirms the state of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 120 (step S815), and if the connection confirmation signal is not output (if it is in the off state), the main board unconnected error. A bit is set (step S816). If the connection confirmation signal is output (if it is on), the main board non-connection error bit is reset (step S817). Note that the communication abnormality detecting means for detecting an abnormality related to communication by executing the processing of step S815 and the like is included in the payout control means, and is therefore mounted on the payout control board 98.

  Also, the payout control microcomputer 660 confirms the value of the switch timer corresponding to the payout number count switch 116 among the switch timers in which the state of the detection signal of each switch is set, and the value is the switch on maximum time ( For example, if it exceeds “240” (step S818), the bit of the payout switch abnormality detection error 1 is set in the error flag (step S819). If the value of the switch timer corresponding to the payout count switch 116 is equal to or shorter than the switch-on maximum time, the payout switch abnormality detection error 1 bit is reset (step S820). Note that the value of each switch timer is incremented by 1 when the state of the input port to which the detection signal of each switch is input is switched on in the input determination process of step S751, and cleared by 0 when it is off. Therefore, the fact that the value of the switch timer corresponding to the payout number count switch 116 has exceeded the maximum switch-on time means that the payout number count switch 116 has been turned on beyond the maximum switch-on time. It is determined that the game ball is clogged at the disconnection of the payout number count switch 116 or at the portion of the payout number count switch 116.

  Also, the payout control microcomputer 660, when the value of the switch timer corresponding to the payout number count switch 116 becomes a switch-on determination value (for example, “2”) (step S821), the ball lending operation flag and the award If both the ball operation flags are in the reset state, the game ball passes through the payout number count switch 116 even though the payout operation is not in progress, and the bit of the payout switch abnormality detection error 2 is set in the error flag (step S822). S823). If the ball lending operation flag or the winning ball operation flag is set, the bit of the payout switch abnormality detection error 2 is reset (step S824).

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 660 confirms the input state of the VL signal from the card unit device 731 (step S825). If the VL signal is not input (if it is in the off state), the prepaid error flag is prepaid. The card unit unconnected error bit is set (step S826). If the VL signal is input (if it is on), the prepaid card unit unconnected error bit is reset (step S827).

  Next, it is confirmed whether or not an error bit is set (step S828). When the error bit is set, a gaming machine error state signal is output to the gaming control microcomputer 99 (step 829). In the present embodiment, when a gaming machine error state signal is input to the gaming control microcomputer 99, as described above, the payout prohibition command is sent from the gaming control microcomputer 99 to the effect control microcomputer 118. Is output. Then, when receiving the payout prohibition command, the effect control microcomputer 118 displays a notification that the ball game machine 1 is in the payout prohibition state on the decorative symbol display device 44b, as will be described later.

  In this embodiment, for example, even when the full error bit is set in step S809 or when the ball break error bit is set in step S812, in step S829 Although an example in which the same gaming machine error status signal is output to the gaming control microcomputer 99 has been described, the present invention is not limited to this, and different error status signals are output to the gaming control microcomputer 99 depending on the type of error bit. It may be. Then, the game control microcomputer 99 may output a payout prohibition command corresponding to the received error state signal to the effect control microcomputer 118 to perform notification display according to the type of error bit.

  In this embodiment, the main board non-connection error is automatically eliminated when the connection confirmation signal is turned on (see steps S815 and S817), but the condition that the error release switch 665 is further operated is added. Thus, the error state may be eliminated.

  In this embodiment, a communication error is reported so as to be distinguishable from a communication error with the card unit device 731 (a prepaid card unit unconnected error and a prepaid card unit communication error) and other errors (FIG. 70). reference). Therefore, a communication error between the game control microcomputer 99 and the payout control microcomputer 660 is easily identified.

  FIG. 73 (A) is a timing diagram showing how a payout case error (payout shortage error) occurs, and FIG. 73 (B) is a timing diagram showing how the error release switch 665 is operated.

  As shown in FIG. 73 (A), the payout motor 115 is rotated to pay out a predetermined number of game balls, and after the stop of the rotation, the game ball that should have been paid out last passes the payout number count switch 116. (After 402.087 ms in this example), it is confirmed whether or not there is an unpaid game ball (corresponding to the determination in step S654), and if there is an unpaid game ball, a re-payout operation is executed. FIG. 73 (A) shows an example in which two re-payout operations are executed. When the two re-payout operations are executed, it is determined as a payout case error (corresponding to the determination in step S672), and “4” is displayed on the error display LED 664 by the display control processing in step S771 ( (See FIG. 70).

  As shown in FIG. 73B, when the error release switch 665 is operated, the re-payout operation is started again after the error release time has elapsed. As shown in FIG. 73B, when the re-payout operation is started again, the display of “4” on the error display LED 664 is erased. That is, when the corrected payout control is performed after the operation of the error release switch 665, the notification indicating the payout insufficient error is not performed.

  74 and 75 are flowcharts showing the display control process (step S759). In the display control process, the payout control microcomputer 660 adds 1 to the value of the 1-byte blinking timer formed in the RAM (step S571). If the ball break error bit is set in the error flag (step S572), the ball break LED output bit in the output port 1 buffer is set (step S573). If the ball break error bit is not set, the ball break LED output bit in the output port 1 buffer is reset (step S574). Note that the contents of the output port 1 buffer are output to the output port 1 in the output process of step S772.

  Further, if the main control unconnected error bit is not set (step S575), the payout control microcomputer 660 is paying out a prize ball (the prize ball operating flag in the payout control state flag is set). (Step S576), the prize ball LED output bit in the output port 1 buffer is set (step S577). If no prize ball is being paid out, the prize ball LED output bit in the output port 1 buffer is reset (step S578).

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 660 includes bits other than the payout switch abnormality detection error 2, the payout case error, the winning ball REQ signal error, and the start error (error that can be canceled by the error cancel switch 665) in the error flag. If it is set, the process proceeds to step S585. If bit 7 of the blinking timer is “1” when the bit set in the error flag is one or more of payout switch abnormality detection error 2, payout case error and prize ball REQ signal error ( In step S580), a prize ball LED output bit in the output port 1 buffer is set (step S581). If bit 7 of the blinking timer is not “1”, the prize ball LED output bit in the output port 1 buffer is reset (step S582). When an error that can be corrected by an artificial operation has occurred by the processing of steps S579 to S581, that effect is notified from the player or the like so as to be visible. In this embodiment, the notification is made by blinking the prize ball LED 10. Therefore, the player or the game store clerk can easily recognize that an error has occurred so that the error can be canceled by a manual operation and the gaming machine can be returned to the normal state.

  The payout control microcomputer 660 loads an error flag (step S585), determines an error code (7SEG display code; see FIG. 75) corresponding to the error bit in the error flag (step S586), and determines the determined error. The code is set in the output port 2 output buffer (step S587).

  In this embodiment, the fact that an error relating to payout has occurred is notified by the error display LED 664 mounted on the payout control board 98 installed on the back side of the gaming machine. You may mount an alerting | reporting means in the other location (For example, the payout unit in which the ball payout apparatus 154 grade | etc., Was concentratedly arranged). Furthermore, you may make it alert | report by the indicator (for example, prize ball LED10) installed in the front side of the gaming machine. Further, the payout control microcomputer 660 performs control for lighting the prize ball LED 10 when the prize ball REQ signal is on in the display control process, and when the prize ball REQ signal is off, Control for turning off the prize ball LED 10 is performed. When an error related to payout occurs, for example, the prize ball LED 10 is blinked to notify that an error related to payout has occurred. If an error is notified by a display device installed on the front side of the gaming machine, the game shop clerk can more easily recognize the occurrence of the error. Moreover, you may use together the alerting | reporting by LED 664 for error display, and the alerting | reporting by the indicator installed in the front side of the gaming machine.

  Further, in this embodiment, the error notification is visually notified by the error display LED 664, but the notification mode is not limited to the visual one. For example, a sound generating means such as a buzzer may be mounted on the payout control board 98, or a buzzer board that is electrically connected to the payout control board 98 and provided with a buzzer may be provided, and an error notification may be provided by the buzzer or the like. . In addition, an audio output means such as a speaker may be used to notify that an error has occurred by voice and the type of error.

  Next, a method for sending a control command from the main board 120 to the effect control board 90 will be described. As shown in FIG. 76, in this embodiment, the effect control command (specifically, the effect control signal constituting the effect control command) has a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification). The second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  As shown in FIG. 77, the 8-bit effect control signal of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 118 mounted on the effect control board 90 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process. Therefore, when viewed from the effect control means, the effect control INT signal corresponds to a capture signal that triggers the capture of the effect control signal.

  The effect control command is sent only once so that the effect control microcomputer 118 can recognize it. In this example, “recognizable” means that the level of the production control INT signal changes, and that it is sent only once so as to be recognizable, for example, in accordance with the first and second bytes of the production control signal. The effect control INT signal is output in a pulse shape (rectangular wave shape) only once. Note that the effect control INT signal may have a polarity opposite to that shown in FIG.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control board 90. In the example shown in FIG. 78, a command 80XX (H) (XX corresponds to the type of variation pattern) indicates a variation pattern in the ornament symbol display device 44b that performs variable display (variation) of the ornament symbol in synchronization with the variation of the special symbol. This is an effect control command to be specified. Note that a command for specifying a variation pattern (variation pattern command) also serves as a variation start instruction. The effect control command corresponds to a display control command for instructing display control, and also functions as a lamp control command and an audio control command for instructing lamp control and audio control.

  Command A000 (H) is an effect control command for instructing stop of variable display of decorative symbols.

  Command D001 (H) is a recovery command transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started (see step S94 in FIG. 31). When the restoration process is executed based on the data stored in the backup RAM, the game control microcomputer 99 transmits an effect control command of D001 (H) (step S14).

  When receiving the command D001 (H), the effect control microcomputer 118 displays a screen for notifying that the restoration process has been executed on the decorative symbol display device 44b. Note that the effect control microcomputer 118 in this embodiment has undergone initialization processing when the command D001 (H) is not received within a predetermined period after the power supply to the gaming machine is started. And an initial screen (for example, demonstration screen) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 44b.

  When receiving the command B001 (H), the effect control microcomputer 118 displays a screen for notifying that the payout prohibited state is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 44b. As described above, when a different error status signal corresponding to the type of error bit is input to the game control microcomputer 99, a payout prohibition command corresponding to the error status signal is sent to the effect control microcomputer 118. It may be input. Thereby, the notification display according to the kind of error bit can be performed.

  Next, a method for sending a control command from the effect control board 90 to the voice frame lamp board 92 will be described. When the effect control microcomputer 118 receives the effect control command from the main board 120, the lamp and the speaker cause the voice frame lamp board 92 to perform a lamp in an effect synchronized with the effect by the decorative symbol display device 44b. Send control commands and voice control commands.

  As illustrated in FIG. 79, when the lamp control command and the voice control command are transmitted from the production control board 90 to the voice frame lamp board 92, the production control microcomputer 118 and the voice frame lamp control microcomputer 92a are as follows. , Perform two-way communication. In the example shown in FIG. 79, the production control microcomputer 118 outputs, for example, a 1-byte lamp control signal (or audio control signal) transmitted through 8 signal lines and a lamp control REQ signal (or audio control). REQ signal) is turned on. When the sound frame lamp control microcomputer 92a takes in the lamp control signal (or sound control signal), it outputs a one-pulse lamp control response signal (or sound control response signal). When the effect control microcomputer 118 detects that the lamp control response signal (or voice control response signal) is turned off after being turned on, the lamp control REQ signal (or voice control REQ signal) is turned off. To. Note that such a control command transmission method is an example, and other transmission methods may be used as long as the lamp control command and the voice control command are transmitted from the effect control board 90 to the voice frame lamp board 92 by bidirectional communication. May be used.

  Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 118 will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 118. When power supply to the gaming machine is started and the reset signal becomes high level, the effect control microcomputer 118 starts main processing. In the main process, the effect control microcomputer 118 first performs an initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initializing a timer for determining the start interval of effect control, and the like ( Step S771). Thereafter, the effect control microcomputer 118 executes a process of notifying whether the restoration process has been performed or the initialization process has been performed, depending on whether or not the command D001 (H) has been received within a predetermined period. .

  Specifically, first, a recovery weight designation value is set in the wait counter 4 (step S772). As the wait counter 4, a general-purpose register (HL register or BC register) built in the effect control microcomputer 118 is used. Then, the effect control microcomputer 118 determines whether or not a restoration command has been received (step S773). When it is determined that the recovery command has been received, a notification display indicating that the recovery process has been performed (for example, “recovered” or the like is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 44b) is performed (step S774). On the other hand, when it is determined that the recovery command has not been received, the value of the wait counter 4 is decremented by 1 (step S775), and it is determined whether or not the value of the wait counter 4 has become 0 (step S776). When it is determined in step S776 that the value of the wait counter 4 is not 0, the process proceeds to step S773 again. If it is determined in step S776 that the value of the weight counter 4 is not 0, a notification display indicating that the initialization process has been performed (for example, “initialized” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 44b) is displayed. Do. That is, the production control microcomputer 118 determines whether or not the restoration command has been received until the value of the weight counter 4 becomes zero, and receives the restoration command even if the value of the weight counter 4 becomes zero. If not, it is determined that initialization processing has been performed.

  Note that the restoration weight designation value in the present embodiment is set in advance to a value larger than the total value of the initialization weight number designation value 1 and the initialization weight number designation value 2 described above. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the game control microcomputer 99 has not finished the software delay process described above, and the process of step S94 in FIG. 31 is not executed. It is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the final determination as to whether or not the recovery command is received by the microcomputer 118 is made. That is, the final determination is made as to whether or not the restoration command is received at the production control microcomputer 118 at a timing earlier than that even though the restoration process is performed in the game control microcomputer 99 and the restoration command is transmitted. Thus, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that a notification display indicating that the initialization process has been performed due to not receiving the recovery command is performed.

  Next, the timer interrupt flag is monitored by the production control microcomputer 118 (step S778). When a timer interruption occurs, the production control microcomputer 118 sets “1” as the value of the timer interruption flag in the timer interruption process. If “1” is set as the value of the timer interrupt flag in step S778, the effect control microcomputer 118 clears the value of the timer interrupt flag (step S779), and executes the following effect control processing. .

  A timer interrupt occurs every 2 ms, for example. That is, the effect control process is activated, for example, every 2 ms. Further, in the timer interrupt process in this embodiment, only the process of setting “1” as the value of the timer interrupt flag is performed, and the specific effect control process is executed in the main process, but the timer interrupt process The effect control process may be executed.

  In the effect control process, the effect control microcomputer 118 first analyzes the received effect control command (command analysis execution process: step S780). Next, the effect control microcomputer 118 performs effect control process processing (step S781). In the effect control process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the decorative symbol display device 44b is executed. Further, the effect control microcomputer 118 performs a motor drive signal output process (step S782). In the motor drive signal output process, a process of outputting a drive signal to the motor 950 is executed in order to operate the hammer 951.

  In addition, an operation signal from the operation button 19a and detection signals from the sensors 954 and 955 are input via the input port 669, and a response signal from the voice frame lamp control microcomputer 92a described with reference to FIG. 79 ( A data input process for inputting a lamp control response signal, a voice control response signal, etc.) via the input / output port 671 is executed (step S783). In the present embodiment, the peripheral command relay board 57 provided on the signal path between the main board 120 and the effect control board 90 is provided with a unidirectional circuit. Therefore, the signal from the effect control board 90, the signal input to the effect control board 90 (the operation signal of the operation button 19a and the detection signals of the sensors 954 and 955), and the voice frame lamp board 92 connected to the effect control board 90. A signal from a board (peripheral board or the like not connected to the main board 120) is not transmitted to the game control microcomputer 99 of the main board 120 due to the presence of the peripheral command relay board 57. Therefore, the signal input path from the outside to the game control microcomputer 99 is limited, and the possibility of an illegal act of sending an illegal signal to the game control microcomputer 99 can be reduced.

  And the process which updates a random number counter is performed (step S784). Thereafter, the process returns to the process of checking the timer interrupt flag in step S778. An INT signal for effect control from the main board 120 is input to the interrupt terminal of the microcomputer 118 for effect control. For example, when the INT signal from the main board 120 is turned on, a timer interrupt is generated in the production control microcomputer 118. Then, the effect control microcomputer 118 executes effect control command reception processing in the interrupt processing. In the effect control command reception process, the effect control microcomputer 118 stores the received effect control command data in the command reception buffer.

  FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S781) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control microcomputer 118 executes one of steps S800 to S805 in accordance with the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not an effect control command (variation pattern command) capable of specifying the fluctuation time is received by the command reception interrupt process. For example, it is confirmed whether or not a flag (variation pattern reception flag) indicating that a variation pattern command has been received is set. The variation pattern reception flag is set when it is confirmed by command analysis processing that a variation pattern designation effect control command has been received. When it is confirmed that the effect control command designating the variation pattern has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to step S801.

  Decoration symbol variation start processing (step S801): A combination of a variation pattern to be actually used and a stop symbol of the ornament symbol is determined from a plurality of variation patterns of ornament symbols determined according to the variation pattern command. Also. The decoration design (left middle right design) changes in the design display device 44b. Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to step S802.

  Symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed, etc.) constituting the variation pattern, and monitors the end of the variation time. Further, stop control of the left and right symbols is performed. Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to step S803.

  Decoration symbol stop process (step S803): If the effect control command (decoration symbol stop effect control command: confirmation command) is received after the fluctuation time has elapsed, the symbol change is stopped and the stop symbol is stopped. Control to display (definite symbol) is performed. Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to step S804.

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the fluctuation time, the control of probability variable big hit display or normal big hit display is performed. Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to step S805.

  Process during jackpot game (step S805): Control during jackpot game is performed. For example, when an effect control command for display before opening the big winning opening or display when opening the big winning opening is received, display control of the number of rounds is performed. Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to step S800.

  FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing a decorative symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol variation start process, the effect control microcomputer 118 determines a decorative symbol variation pattern based on the received variation pattern command (step S871). In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 118 uniquely determines at least a part of the decorative pattern variation pattern. For example, the variation time specified by the EXT data of the variation pattern command and the pre-determined result by the game control microcomputer 99 (big hit, miss, reach, etc.) among the variation patterns of a plurality of types of decorative symbols prepared in advance A variation pattern to be executed is selected from among a plurality of types of variation patterns of decorative designs.

  In other words, the production control microcomputer 118, for example, at least one of the decorative pattern variation modes, such as the design content of the decorative design (for example, which character is used to produce), the presence / absence of execution of the notice effect, and the content of the production. The department is decided independently. In step S871, the production control microcomputer 118 is linked to the operation mode of the movable member and the movable member, such as the presence / absence of the production and the content of the production in which the hammer 951 as the movable member and the decorative design are co-operated. At least a part of the decorative pattern variation mode is uniquely determined. Also, a variation time timer corresponding to the variation period of the decorative symbol is started, and an instruction is given to the VDP 119 so that the variation of the left middle right decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display device 44b (step S872). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the process during symbol variation (step S873).

  FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the motor drive signal output process (step S782) shown in FIG. In the motor drive signal output process, the effect control microcomputer 118 uses the change pattern determined in step S871 described above as a change pattern in which an effect in which the hammer 951 and the decorative symbol are co-operated is executed. It is determined whether or not it is the operation possible timing predetermined by the variation pattern (step S875). The operable timing may be a timing at which button guidance display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 44b.

  If it is determined that it is the operable timing, it is determined whether or not the rotation flag is set to the on state (step S876). The rotation flag is a flag indicating that the motor 950 that rotates the hammer 951 is driven. When the forward rotation flag is set, a drive signal for forward rotation is output to the motor 950, and the reverse rotation flag. When is set, a drive signal for reverse rotation is output to the motor 950. When it is determined that the rotation flag is not set to the on state, it is determined whether or not an operation signal from the operation button 19a is input (step S877). That is, it is determined whether or not an operation signal is input in the data input process of step S783. When it is determined that an operation signal from the operation button 19a is input, a normal rotation flag for outputting a drive signal for normal rotation to the motor 950 is set (step S878).

  If NO is determined in step S875 or S877, or if YES is determined in step S877, the process proceeds to step S879 without performing the process in step S878.

  In step S879, it is determined whether or not the forward rotation flag is set to an on state. If it is determined that the forward rotation flag is in the ON state, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the sensor 955 has been input (step S880). That is, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input in the data input process of step S783. When it is determined that the detection signal from the sensor 955 is not input, a forward rotation drive signal for rotating the motor 950 forward is output (step S882), and the process proceeds to step S883. As a result, the motor 950 is rotated forward and the hammer 951 is swung down. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection signal from the sensor 955 is input, the normal rotation flag is turned off, and the reverse rotation flag for outputting the reverse rotation drive signal to the motor 950 is set. (Step S881), the process proceeds to Step S883. If NO is determined in step S879, the process proceeds to step S883.

  In step S883, it is determined whether the reverse rotation flag is set to ON. When it is determined that the reverse rotation flag is on, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the sensor 954 is input (step S884). That is, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input in the data input process of step S783. When it is determined that the detection signal from the sensor 954 is not input, a reverse rotation drive signal for reversely rotating the motor 950 is output (step S886), and the motor drive signal output process is terminated. As a result, the motor 950 is rotated in the reverse direction, and the hammer 951 returns to the original position. On the other hand, when it is determined that the detection signal from the sensor 954 is input, the reverse rotation flag is turned off, the reverse rotation drive signal output to the motor 950 is stopped (step S885), and the motor is driven. The signal output process ends. If NO is determined in step S883, the motor drive signal output process is terminated.

  Thus, when the operation button 19a is operated at the operable timing, the hammer 951 can be rotated forward until the detection signal of the sensor 955 indicates the on state. Further, when the detection signal of the sensor 955 indicates the on state, the hammer 951 can be rotated in the reverse direction until the detection signal of the sensor 954 indicates the on state.

  Next, a specific example of the game effect using the hammer 951 will be described. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the relationship between the display state of the decorative symbol display device 44 b and the operation state of the hammer 951. When the variation pattern of the decorative design is determined in response to the reception of the variation pattern command, the effect control microcomputer 118 starts the variation display of the decorative design on the decorative design display device 44b (see FIG. 84A). Here, it is assumed that the effect pattern using the hammer 951 as the movable member is determined as the decorative pattern variation pattern in step S871.

  When a predetermined period elapses after the decorative symbol variation display is started, the effect control microcomputer 118 displays the left middle right symbol in the temporary stop state (not the final stop but the stop display) in the display area H1 of the decorative symbol display device 44b. And a button guidance display for prompting the player to press the operation button 19a is displayed in the display area H2 (see FIG. 84B). For example, a message “Press the button!” Is displayed as the button guidance display.

  When the player presses the operation button 19a during the period in which the button guidance display is being executed (FIG. 84C), the effect control microcomputer 118 ends the button guidance display and the motor 950 is turned on. On the other hand, a drive signal for forward rotation is output. Note that the effect control microcomputer 118 ignores even if the operation button 19a is pressed and an operation signal is output during a period when the button guidance display is not executed. Therefore, the operation button 19a as an operation means that can be operated by the player during the game is actually operable during the operable period set by the effect control microcomputer 118 during the game.

  When a drive signal for forward rotation is output to the motor 950, the hammer 951 performs an operation of swinging down in the forward rotation (clockwise direction) (see FIG. 84D). Further, the production control microcomputer 118 determines the timing at which the hammer 951 is swung down in accordance with the input timing of the signal from the operation button 19a, and out of the decorative symbols in the temporary stop state in synchronization with the determination timing. The display of the left pattern of the decorative pattern is started, and the display of re-change is started. In this embodiment, the hammer 951 is installed so as to pass the display position of the left symbol when it is swung down. Therefore, the display of the decorative symbol display device 44b and the operation of the hammer 951 produce an effect as if the left symbol of the decorative symbols in the temporarily stopped state is resumed from being fluctuated by being hit by the hammer 951. Executed.

  When re-variation display of the left symbol is started, the effect control microcomputer 118 outputs a drive signal for reverse rotation to the motor 950. When a drive signal for reverse rotation is output to the motor 950, the hammer 951 moves in the reverse direction (counterclockwise direction) and returns to its original position (FIG. 84E). FIG. 84 (F)).

  Then, when the decorative symbol variation time has elapsed, the production control microcomputer 118 stops the left symbol so as to become the determined stop symbol. That is, when it is determined to be a jackpot symbol, the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result of variable display (see FIG. 84E), and when it is determined to be an off symbol, it is variable. As a display result of the display, the symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 84F).

  FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram showing another example of the relationship between the display state of the decorative symbol display device 44b and the operation state of the hammer 951. As shown in FIG. 85, when the operation button 19a is not pressed by the player during the period in which the button guidance display is being executed, the effect control microcomputer 118 displays the re-variable display after a predetermined time has elapsed. (See FIG. 85C). Other display controls are the same as the display control shown in FIG. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 118 stops the left symbol so as to become the determined stop symbol when the decorative symbol variation time elapses. When it is determined to be a big hit symbol, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result of variable display (see FIG. 85 (D)), and when it is determined to be an off symbol, a variable display is selected. As a display result, the off symbol is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 85 (E)).

  Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.

  In the above-described embodiment, the gaming control microcomputer transmits a payout activation command to the payout control microcomputer when power supply to the gaming machine is started (step S5), and then the clear switch 921 A detection signal check process is performed (step S7), and the payout control microcomputer checks the detection signal of the clear switch 921 when receiving a payout activation command from the game control microcomputer (steps S726 and S727). , S708), the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer perform check processing of the detection signal of the clear switch 921 almost simultaneously. Therefore, although one microcomputer performs the check processing of the detection signal of the clear switch 921, the other microcomputer does not perform the detection processing of the detection signal of the clear switch 921, and the backup storage contents in the one microcomputer. It is prevented that a situation occurs in which the backup storage contents in the other microcomputer are not cleared despite being cleared.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer introduces a take-in signal (in the above embodiment, a prize ball REQ signal) for instructing taking-in of the payout start command into the maskable interrupt terminal of the payout control microcomputer, thereby controlling the game. When it is confirmed that the payout start command has been sent from the microcomputer (the initial setting process is in progress), the interrupt signal is disabled and the external interrupt request register bit is checked to check the capture signal. Is confirmed (steps S701 and S721). Therefore, even if the acquisition signal is introduced to the interrupt terminal, there is no possibility that the initial setting process is not correctly performed due to the occurrence of the interrupt. If an interrupt is allowed during the initial setting process, the internal state of the payout control microcomputer may change during the interrupt process, and the initial setting process may not be performed correctly.

  In the above-described embodiment, the payout of the winning ball can be stopped in response to the setting of the ball break error bit, the full tank error bit, or the like. Thereby, when it is not possible to pay out the ball due to the ball running out or the lower tray full, the payout can be prohibited (steps S809, S812, S621, etc.). Further, in response to setting of a ball breakage error bit, a full tank error bit, etc., a gaming machine error state signal is output from the payout control microcomputer to the gaming control microcomputer, and the gaming control microcomputer Can output a payout prohibiting command indicating that the payout is prohibited from the effect control microcomputer (step S829). Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer can notify the fact that it is in the payout prohibited state by the decorative symbol display device 44b or the like based on the payout prohibition command (step S28). For this reason, a player, a game hall manager, or the like can be easily recognized that the payout is prohibited.

  In the above-described embodiment, when the game control side recovery process is performed by the game control microcomputer 99, a recovery command for notifying the fact is output to the effect control microcomputer 118 as an effect control command. (Step S94). Then, a notification display that the restoration process has been performed is performed in the decorative symbol display device 44b (step S774). For this reason, it is possible for the player, the game hall manager, and the like to easily recognize that the game control side restoration process has been performed.

  Further, on the side of the production control microcomputer 118, when the restoration command is not received from when the power supply is started until the predetermined restoration weight designated value is subtracted to 0 (steps S775 and S776), In step S777, a notification display indicating that the initialization process has been performed is performed (step S777). This makes it possible for a player, a game hall manager, or the like to easily recognize that the game control side initialization process has been performed without transmitting a command indicating that the game control side initialization process has been performed. it can.

  Since the game control microcomputer in the above-described embodiment executes software delay processing (steps S81 to S86), a payout activation command and a prize ball REQ signal are output before the payout control microcomputer starts up. And the occurrence of inconvenience that the payout activation command and the prize ball REQ signal cannot be received can be prevented.

  Since the payout control microcomputer in the above-described embodiment repeatedly executes the process of S721 until YES is determined in the process of step S721, the payout activation command and the prize ball REQ signal can be reliably received. it can.

  The payout control microcomputer according to the above-described embodiment sets the unbootable flag in step S724 when it is determined in step S723 that the register value is 0 as a result of subtracting 1 in the process of step S722. In step S715, the activation error bit is set, and the error display LED 664 notifies that the prize ball REQ signal for taking in the payout activation command is not output in the display control processing in S759. Thereby, the game hall manager can easily recognize that the prize ball REQ signal is not output from the outside by checking the notification display by the error display LED 664.

  In the embodiment described above, the unidirectional circuit 57a provided on the peripheral command relay board 57, for example, an operation signal when the operation button 19a is operated, a signal from the voice frame lamp board 92, a sensor Signals to be input to the effect control microcomputer 118 such as detection signals from 954 and 955 are not input to the game control microcomputer 99, so the effect control microcomputer 118 to the game control microcomputer 99 It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as an illegal signal being input to In addition, since an effect (see FIG. 85) according to the operation of the operation button 19a can be performed, the degree of intervention in the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. Furthermore, since the state of the hammer 951 can be confirmed based on the detection signals from the sensors 954 and 955, the operation of the hammer 951 can be accurately controlled.

  Even if the payout control microcomputer in the above-described embodiment determines that bit 7 of the external interrupt request register is set in S721, after executing the processing of steps S721a to S721c, in S725. Since the payout start command (prize ball control signal) is taken in, the winning ball REQ signal is output from the game control microcomputer but the payout start command has not been output yet. It is possible to prevent inconveniences that cannot be received.

  The payout control microcomputer performs an interrupt process based on the input of an input signal to the maskable interrupt terminal in the payout device control process after step S749 executed after the initial setting process and the initialization process are executed. Since the award ball control signal indicating the award ball payout number is received (see FIG. 59), the award ball payout number based on the award ball control signal can be received quickly and accurately.

  In the above-described embodiment, since the error flag state is not referred to in the prize ball lending control process in step S756 and the process is continued even in an error state, When a payout is detected, a subtraction process of a prize ball non-payout number counter is executed in step S603. Thereby, even if an error state occurs, the number of game balls paid out can be managed accurately.

  In the above-described embodiment, even when a winning at the winning opening occurs immediately before the power supply is stopped, the number of winning balls is reliably counted by the processing of steps S906 and S909 in the payout control microcomputer. Can be added to and saved. In addition, the backup function can be realized with a simple hardware configuration.

  In the above-described embodiment, the ball that has flowed into the ball dispensing device 154 is a ball stopper member that is grounded via the reinforcing hinge member 176, the prize ball tank 147, the ball alignment rail member 148, and the ball passage cover member 156. The partition plate 72 is in contact with the stopper member 159b of 159. Thus, even when a charged ball flows into the ball dispensing device 154, the ball potential is brought to the ground level by contacting the partition plate 72, so that static noise is prevented from flowing into the dispensing motor 115. It is possible to prevent the dispensing motor 115 from malfunctioning or breaking.

  In the above-described embodiment, the reinforcing hinge member 176 is attached to the mechanism plate 140 so that the mechanism plate 140 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 3, the prize ball tank 147, the ball alignment rail member 148, the ball passage cover member 156, Ball stopper member 159, partition plate 72, ball hitting device 130, locking device 128, plastic frame reinforcing bracket 371 a, plastic frame hinge bracket 314, conductive plate 40 a, guide rails 42 a and 42 b, obstacle nail 37 a, front door frame 4 A plurality of members such as an upper hinge bracket, a reinforcing bracket for the front door frame 4, a lower hinge bracket, a reinforcing bracket for the upper plate opening / closing frame 11, a launch rail 345, and an upper plate bracket are connected to be grounded. It can also be used as a member. For this reason, even when the ball game machine 1 is configured so that a plurality of members can be grounded, the number of components to be mounted can be reduced as much as possible. Moreover, since the range in which the charged ball can be grounded can be expanded, the risk of malfunction or breakage of various devices mounted on the ball game machine 1 due to the influence of electrostatic noise can be reduced as much as possible.

  Next, modifications and feature points of the embodiment described above are listed below.

  (1) In the embodiment described above, the payout start command (payout start command) and the prize ball control signal are transmitted through the same signal line, but the signal lines for transmitting them may be separated. In the embodiment described above, the payout control means transmits a prize ball BUSY signal in response to reception of the prize ball control signal. That is, the prize ball control signal is bidirectionally communicated. The prize ball control signal may be transmitted by one-way communication (the game control means does not take a response from the payout control means). Furthermore, the forms of the payout activation command and the prize ball control signal used in the above-described embodiment may be changed to other forms. For example, a 1-byte or 2-byte command may be transmitted via an 8-bit signal line. When a 2-byte command is used, a capture signal is transmitted for each byte.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the power-off signal, the reset signal, and the clear signal are output from the power supply board 910 to the main board 120 and the payout control board 98 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, a power-off signal, a reset signal, and a clear signal may be output from the power supply board 910 to the payout control board 98 and input to the main board 120 via the payout control board 98. As a result, the power-off signal, the reset signal, and the clear signal from the power supply monitoring circuit 920 are input to the main board 31 via the payout control board 98, thereby simplifying the wiring and reducing the cost of the gaming machine. be able to. In this case, the timing at which the power-off signal, the reset signal, and the clear signal are output from the payout control board 98 may be adjusted. For example, a process for delaying the timing of output to the main board 120 by the payout control microcomputer 660 may be performed. Further, when the payout control microcomputer 660 determines that a predetermined condition is satisfied, a process of outputting to the main board 120 may be performed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the power supply monitoring circuit 920 is mounted on the power supply board 910 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the power supply monitoring circuit 920 may be mounted on the payout control board 98. Thus, it is not necessary to provide at least a signal line (cable) for transmitting a power-off signal from the power supply board to the payout control board. Therefore, the number of signal lines from the power supply board to the electrical component control board can be further reduced. Furthermore, since the overall length of the signal line for transmitting the power-off signal between the substrates is shortened, the possibility of noise from the power-off signal can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, the example in which DC power is supplied from the power supply board 910 to the main board 120 and the payout control board 98 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, DC power supplied from the power supply board 910 to the main board 120 may be passed through the payout control board 98. Further, it may be transmitted / supplied to other sub-boards such as the effect control board 90 via the payout control board 98. According to such a configuration, only one power cable (including a plurality of types of power supply lines) for supplying power from the power supply board 910 to the main board 120 and the payout control board 98 may be installed. The installation position of the signal line for transmitting the power-off signal, the reset signal, and the clear signal is preferably away from the installation position of the power cable so that noise from the power supply does not get on. Since it is sufficient to pull out the power cable of the book, it becomes easy to separate the power cable from the signal line for transmitting the power-off signal, the reset signal, and the clear signal.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the start-up of the game control microcomputer 99 is delayed by software has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the delay (hardware) is not limited to this. Hardware circuit). When the delay circuit is used, the start-up of the game control microcomputer 99 is delayed for a period determined by a preset delay amount. Specifically, a reset signal from the power supply monitoring circuit 920 is input to both the payout control microcomputer 660 and the delay circuit, and after a period determined by the delay amount has elapsed, the delay control circuit sends a game control microcomputer. 99 may be configured to input a reset signal. The delay circuit may be provided on the power supply board 910 or on the payout control board 98.

  (4) In the embodiment described above, the power-off signal from the power supply monitoring circuit 920 is input to both the payout control microcomputer 660 and the game control microcomputer 99 at substantially the same timing, and the power-off signal is An example has been described in which the power supply stop process is executed on the game control side and the payout control side simultaneously with the input. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the control is performed so that the timing at which the power supply stop process is started on the game control side precedes the timing at which the power supply stop process is started on the payout control side. May be. This delays the timing at which the power supply stop process is started on the payout control side when the power is cut off, thereby preventing a player from being disadvantaged due to a loss of a control signal from the game control microcomputer 99. Can do. As a specific means, the timing at which the power-off signal from the power supply monitoring circuit 920 is input to the payout control microcomputer 660 is delayed by executing the software delay processing described above or by providing a delay circuit. You may make it make it.

  (5) In the embodiment described above, the payout request is made by the prize ball REQ signal, and the number of payouts is specified by the prize ball control signal. However, the payout request and the number of payouts are designated by the prize ball control signal. It may be configured. In this case, the payout control means may determine that the payout request is made at the same time when the prize ball control signal is output. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to use the prize ball REQ signal.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 660 determines that the prize ball payout has ended when it detects that the payout motor 115 has rotated by the planned payout number. May be determined to be the end of the prize ball payout. In other words, the payout control means is configured to determine whether or not the payout is completed by detecting the operation amount of the payout means (in this example, the rotation amount of the payout motor 115 or the number of detections by the payout sensor substrate 114). May be.

  (7) In the embodiment described above, the payout control microcomputer 660 receives the prize ball control signal from the game control means of the main board 120 in the main control communication process (step S755) in the timer interrupt process. However, the prize ball REQ signal may be a strobe signal (payout control INT signal) from the main board 120, and the prize ball control signal may be received by an interruption process based on an external interruption.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, the recording medium used in the card unit device 731 (recording medium processing apparatus) is a magnetic card (prepaid card). It may be a type of IC card. In addition, when the recording medium processing apparatus is configured to be able to identify the recording information based on the identification code, the recording medium can at least read the information such as the identification code that can identify the recording information. It may be something that can be recorded on. Further, the recording medium may be one in which a predetermined information recording symbol such as a barcode is printed so as to be readable. The shape of the recording medium is not limited to a card shape, and may be any shape such as a disk shape, a spherical shape, or a chip shape.

  (9) The ball game machine in the above-described embodiment mainly has a predetermined game value when the stop symbol of the special symbol variably displayed on the special symbol display device 44a or the like based on the start winning is a combination of the predetermined symbols. Is a pachinko gaming machine that can be given to a player, but a pachinko gaming machine that can be given a predetermined gaming value to a player when there is a winning in a predetermined area of an electric accessory that is released based on a start winning prize Or a pachinko gaming machine in which a predetermined right is generated or continued when there is a prize for a predetermined electric combination that is released when the symbol of the symbol variably displayed based on the start winning is a combination of the predetermined symbols. Also good. Further, the game medium is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine that is a game ball, and the game medium may be provided with an electrical component for paying out the game medium even in a slot machine such as a coin (medal). .

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, different expressions such as transmission / reception and output / input are used for the exchange of various signals, but transmission and output or reception and input are used in substantially the same meaning. Needless to say, these expressions are interchangeable. In addition, the transmission / reception of signals having many meanings such as control commands is made transmission / reception, and the exchange of signals for transmitting information by switching on / off is made output / input, and transmission / reception and output / input There are also cases where they are used properly. Even in this case, these expressions are interchangeable.

  (11) In the above-described embodiment, the on / off state of the signal may be a high level state / low level state, and conversely may be a low level state / high level state. The signal on / off state may be a signal output state / signal output stop state, or conversely, may be a signal output stop state / signal output state.

  (12) The embodiment disclosed this time should be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

It is a front view of a bullet ball game machine. It is a rear view of a bullet ball game machine. It is an enlarged front view of a game board. It is an enlarged rear view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a mechanism board. It is a perspective view of a ball dispensing device. It is a disassembled perspective view of a ball dispensing apparatus. It is a schematic sectional drawing in BB in FIG. It is a connection diagram of a reinforcing hinge member, a prize ball tank, a ball alignment rail member, a ball passage cover member, a ball stopper member, and a partition plate attached to a mechanism plate. It is a disassembled perspective view from the back surface of a front door frame. It is a perspective view from the back of a frame base. It is a disassembled perspective view from the back surface of an upper decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view from the back of a left decoration unit and a right decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view from the front of the exploded perspective view of a left decorative lamp member and a right decorative lamp member. It is a disassembled perspective view from the front of a front frame. It is a disassembled perspective view from the back surface of a front frame. It is a disassembled perspective view from the front of an upper plate opening-and-closing frame. It is a disassembled perspective view from the front of a lower plate, an ashtray unit, and an operation handle. It is a perspective view of a hit ball launching device. It is a schematic sectional drawing in AA in FIG. Reinforcing hinge member attached to mechanism plate, hitting ball launcher attached to front frame, locking device, plastic frame reinforcing bracket, plastic frame hinge bracket, conductive plate attached to game board, guide rail, obstacle It is a connection diagram, such as a nail. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the drive device of a movable member. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a payout control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of an effect control board and an audio | voice frame lamp board | substrate. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of a power supply board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of bit allocation of the output port in a game control means. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of bit allocation of the output port in a game control means. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the input port in a game control means. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows payout starting command transmission processing. FIG. 6 is a timing chart showing how the microcomputer operates when power supply to the gaming machine is started and when power supply is stopped. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off process. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the buffer used by switch processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a switch process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a control signal. It is a block diagram which shows the signal wire | line etc. which are used for transmission / reception of a control signal. It is a timing diagram which shows an example of how to output a payout control signal. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a prize ball number table. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball number addition process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball control process. It is a flowchart which shows prize ball waiting processing 1. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the winning ball waiting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows prize ball waiting processing 3. It is explanatory drawing which shows the bit allocation example of the output port in a payout control means. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of bit allocation of the input port in a payout control means. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU for payout control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which CPU for payout control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off process which CPU for payout control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off process which CPU for payout control performs. It is a flowchart which shows a discharge motor control process. It is a flowchart which shows a payout motor control process. It is a flowchart which shows a main control communication process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball REQ interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during main control communication. It is a flowchart which shows a main control communication end process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize ball lending control process. It is a flowchart which shows the payout start waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows a payout motor stop waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows payout passage waiting processing. It is a timing diagram for explaining a ball biting detection process. It is a timing diagram for demonstrating a ball biting cancellation | release process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the kind of error, and the display of LED for an error display. It is a flowchart which shows an error process. It is a flowchart which shows an error process. It is a timing diagram which shows the mode of occurrence of the payout case error. It is a flowchart which shows a display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a display control process. It is an explanatory view showing the configuration of a production control command. It is an explanatory view showing how to send the production control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows the method of sending a lamp control command and an audio | voice control command. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU for production control performs. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a decoration design change start process. It is a flowchart which shows a motor drive signal output process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the relationship between the display state of a decoration symbol display apparatus, and the operation state of a hammer. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the relationship between the display state of a decoration symbol display apparatus, and the operation state of a hammer.

Explanation of symbols

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Ball game machine, 3 Front frame, 4 Front door frame, 19a Operation button, 40 Game board, 57 Peripheral command relay board, 90 Production control board, 98 Discharge control board, 99 Game control microcomputer, 120 Main board, 154 ball dispensing device, 660 microcomputer for dispensing control, 910 power supply board, 954, 955 sensor.

Claims (9)

A gaming machine that is capable of playing using a game medium and paying out a prize game medium as a prize based on the fact that a payout condition is established by the game,
A game control microcomputer for executing a game control process for controlling the progress of the game and transmitting an effect control command for controlling an effect device for the effect provided in the gaming machine;
A payout means for paying out the prize game medium;
A payout control microcomputer for executing payout control processing for controlling the payout means;
An effect control microcomputer that executes effect control processing for controlling the effect device based on the effect control command output from the game control microcomputer;
Initialization operation means for outputting an initialization signal in response to the operation;
A relay board that relays the effect control command from the game control microcomputer and outputs it to the effect control microcomputer;
The game control microcomputer is:
Game control storage means for storing game state data indicating a progress state of the game, and holding the game state data for at least a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
Based on the establishment of the payout condition, a payout number signal output for outputting to the payout control microcomputer a payout number signal for designating the number of prize game media to be paid out and a take-in signal for instructing to take in the payout number signal. Means,
An activation signal output means for outputting an activation signal and an acquisition signal for instructing an acquisition of the activation signal to the payout control microcomputer on condition that power supply to the gaming machine is started;
An initialization signal confirmation means for game control for confirming whether or not the initialization signal is output from the initialization operation means after the activation signal output means outputs the activation signal;
Stored in the game control storage means on the condition that power supply to the gaming machine is started and it is confirmed that the initialization signal is not output by the game control initialization signal confirmation means Game control side recovery means for executing a game control side recovery process for recovering the progress state of the game based on the game state data;
When the supply of power to the gaming machine is started and it is confirmed by the game control initialization signal confirmation means that the initialization signal is output, the game stored in the game control storage means Game control side initialization means for executing a game control side initialization process for initializing state data,
The payout control microcomputer indicates the number of unpaid premium game media that have not yet been paid out of the payout number of premium game media designated by the payout number signal output from the payout number signal output means. It includes payout control storage means for storing payout number data and holding the unpaid number data for at least a predetermined period even when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped,
When the game control side restoration process is performed by the game control side restoration means, the game control microcomputer includes a restoration command output means for outputting a restoration command for notifying that effect as the effect control command. In addition,
The production control microcomputer includes a recovery notification means for notifying that the game control side recovery process is executed based on the recovery command output by the recovery command output means,
The dispensing control microcomputer is:
Register value updating means for updating the value of the specific register to a predetermined value on condition that the capture signal is input from the gaming control microcomputer;
Interrupt process execution means for executing an interrupt process on the condition that the value of the specific register is updated to a predetermined value by the register value update means;
Interrupt prohibiting means for shifting to an interrupt disabled state for prohibiting execution of interrupt processing by the interrupt processing executing means;
Register value confirming means for confirming whether or not the value of the specific register is a predetermined value by the register value updating means;
In response to the power supply to the gaming machine, the interrupt prohibiting means shifts to the interrupt prohibited state, and the register value updating means outputs the value of the specific register based on the output of the activation signal capture signal. Is updated, and when the register value confirmation means confirms that the value of the specific register is a predetermined value, the activation signal receiving means for receiving the activation signal output from the activation signal output means,
An initialization signal confirmation means for payout control for confirming whether or not the initialization signal is output from the initialization operation means on the condition that the activation signal receiving means has received the activation signal;
Payout is possible based on the unpaid number data stored in the payout control storage means, provided that the payout control initialization signal confirmation means confirms that the initialization signal has not been output. Payout control side recovery means for executing the payout control side recovery processing to be,
The payout control side initializing the unpaid number data stored in the payout control storage means when the payout control initialization signal confirmation means confirms that the initialization signal is output. Payout control side initialization means for executing the processing,
After the payout control side recovery process is performed by the payout control side recovery means, or after the payout control side initialization process is performed by the payout control side initialization means, execution of the interrupt process is permitted. An interrupt permission means for controlling the interrupt permission state;
The number of payouts output by the payout number signal output means in the interrupt process controlled by the interrupt permission means and executed based on the output of the take-in signal of the payout number signal. A payout number signal receiving means for receiving a signal;
Unpaid number data adding means for adding the number of payouts of the prize game medium designated by the payout number signal received by the payout number signal receiving means to the unpaid number data stored in the payout control storage means;
A prize game medium payout control means for controlling the payout means to pay out an unpaid prize game medium indicated by the unpaid-out number data ;
When shifting to the interrupt prohibited state by the interrupt prohibiting means, when the value of the specific register is not confirmed to be a predetermined value by the register value confirming means even after a predetermined period of time, further seen containing a unstartable information storage means for game control microcomputer stores the unstartable information indicating that the startup failure, and
The payout number signal output by the payout number signal output means and the start signal output by the start signal output means are signals transmitted through the same plurality of signal lines, respectively.
The take-in number signal output signal output by the pay-out number signal output means and the start-up signal take-in signal output by the start-up signal output means are signals transmitted through the same signal line, respectively. Yes, input to the interrupt terminal of the payout control microcomputer,
The payout control microcomputer further outputs the initialization signal from the initialization operation means by the payout control initialization signal confirmation means when the start impossible information is stored in the start impossible information storage means. A game machine characterized by initializing unpaid-out number data stored in the payout control storage means without confirming whether or not the payout has been made . The game control microcomputer further includes a game control side time measuring means for measuring a lapse of a predetermined time before the start signal output signal is output by the start signal output means.
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the activation signal output unit outputs a capture signal of the activation signal after it is measured that the predetermined time has elapsed by the game control side time measurement unit. .   The register value confirming means determines that the value of the specific register is updated by the register value updating means based on the output of the acquisition signal of the start signal when the interrupt prohibiting means shifts to the interrupt prohibited state. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein it is repeatedly checked whether or not the value of the specific register is a predetermined value until it is updated.   The payout control microcomputer is provided on the condition that the register value confirmation means confirms that the value of the specific register is not a predetermined value when the interruption prohibition means shifts to the interrupt prohibited state. The game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, further comprising unconfirmed notification means for notifying that the activation signal capture signal is not output.   5. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising signal input blocking means for blocking signal input from the effect control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer. Game operating means that can be operated by the player while the game is in progress;
A game operation signal input means for inputting a game operation signal corresponding to the operation when the game operation means is operated,
The production control microcomputer includes an operation corresponding production start unit for starting a specific production in the production device based on the game operation signal input by the game operation signal input unit. Item 6. The gaming machine according to Item 5. Further comprising a peripheral board on which a control circuit that performs control according to the type of the rendering device is mounted,
The production control microcomputer outputs a command for controlling the production device to the control circuit according to the type of the production device connected to the control circuit by bidirectional communication with the control circuit. The gaming machine according to claim 5 or 6, characterized by the above. A movable member that operates according to the gaming state;
Position detecting means for detecting the position of the movable member,
8. The production control microcomputer includes position determination means for determining the position of the movable member based on a detection signal indicating a detection result of the position detection means. The gaming machine described in Crab. The payout control microcomputer further includes payout control side time measuring means for measuring the passage of a predetermined time before receiving the start signal by the start signal receiving means,
The start signal receiving means receives the start signal output from the start signal output means after it is measured that the predetermined time has passed by the payout control side time measuring means. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 8.

Images